WO2020029866A1 - Method and apparatus for determining transport block size - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for determining transport block size Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020029866A1
WO2020029866A1 PCT/CN2019/098944 CN2019098944W WO2020029866A1 WO 2020029866 A1 WO2020029866 A1 WO 2020029866A1 CN 2019098944 W CN2019098944 W CN 2019098944W WO 2020029866 A1 WO2020029866 A1 WO 2020029866A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
tbs
code rate
equal
determining
transmission block
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/098944
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡丹
李�远
官磊
李胜钰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201910028872.1A external-priority patent/CN110830161B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020029866A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020029866A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/16Central resource management; Negotiation of resources or communication parameters, e.g. negotiating bandwidth or QoS [Quality of Service]

Definitions

  • Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method and device for determining a transmission block size.
  • the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system has emerged at the historic moment.
  • ITU International Telecommunication Union
  • URLLC Delay communication (ultra reliable and low communication)
  • the main characteristics of the URLLC service are the requirement for ultra-high reliability, low latency, less data transmission, and burstiness.
  • a transport block size In the process of transmitting data between a terminal device and a network device, a transport block size (TBS) needs to be determined.
  • the so-called transport block size is the amount of data (bits) carried on the time-frequency resources.
  • slot-based data can be repeatedly transmitted to determine the TBS in a time slot.
  • non-slot-based repeated transmission of data can be used to meet the characteristics of low latency. Therefore, how to determine the TBS based on non-slot repetition is an urgent problem.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and a device for determining a transmission block size, which solves the problem of how to determine a TBS based on non-slot repetition.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes A chip system
  • the method includes: after receiving data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times, determining the TBS according to the number of resource elements (RE) and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and according to the TBS Decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit
  • M is greater than Or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes A chip system, the method includes: first determining the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, and then repeatedly transmitting the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS, where M is greater than Or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K is the number of times pre-configured retransmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit; S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1 And is less than or equal to K.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the first aspect.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the first aspect, for example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block.
  • the device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the first aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit received by the receiving unit according to the TBS.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit
  • M is greater than Or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the second aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the second aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block.
  • the device is a network device or a device for supporting a network device that implements the method described in the second aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit is configured to determine a TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface for sending the TBS determined according to the processing unit to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • the first transmission timing in K is t
  • the first transmission timing is the first transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K .
  • the actual number of repetitions may be different depending on the timing of the first transmission.
  • S K-t + 1, which represents the actual number of repeated transmissions of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit in the second time unit.
  • S K, which represents the actual number of repetitions of repeatedly transmitting data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit in the second time unit.
  • M a modulation and coding mode included in a first time unit
  • the first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K.
  • the second scale factor is less than 1.
  • the first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, and P is greater than Or equal to 1, and less than K.
  • the processing module is further configured to:
  • the TBS is adjusted by the degree factor to obtain a second adjusted TBS, and the second scale factor is less than 1.
  • the TBS of the copy itself is multiplied by the scale factor and the average TBS of all duplicate copies
  • the adjusted TBS is used as the TBS repeated based on the first time unit.
  • the so-called copy refers to the data carried once transmitted on the time-frequency resource.
  • the time domain resources required for repeated transmission of data based on the first time unit may also exceed the time-frequency resources included in a second time unit.
  • M K, that is, the TBS is still determined according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding methods included in the K first time units, which is not suitable because the number of REs included in the K first time units exceeds one.
  • the number of REs included in the second time unit may further include the following specific implementation manners.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method may be applied to a terminal device, or the method may be applied to a device for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes Chip system
  • the RE number and modulation and coding mode determine the TBS, and the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is decoded according to the TBS.
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
  • the reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or, the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R first time units, R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than the duration of the second time unit.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates a TBS based on the number of REs corresponding to the reference duration, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeats the transmission K times. Therefore, on the premise that the upper limit of the number of symbols used for calculating the TBS is exceeded, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all or a part of the transport blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method may be applied to a terminal device, or the method may be applied to a device for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes Chip system
  • the reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or, the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R first time units, R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than the duration of the second time unit.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates a TBS based on the number of REs corresponding to the reference duration, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeats the transmission K times. Therefore, on the premise that the upper limit of the number of symbols used for calculating the TBS is exceeded, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all or a part of the transport blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the fifth aspect.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifth aspect, for example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block.
  • the apparatus is a network device or an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that implements the method described in the fifth aspect by supporting a network device.
  • the apparatus for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the TBS is determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method, and received by the TBS decoding receiving unit.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the sixth aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the sixth aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or a device for determining a transmission block size.
  • the device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the sixth aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface configured to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS determined by the processing unit.
  • the first transmission timing in K is t
  • the first transmission timing is the first time that the corresponding transmission is carried in the first time unit.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, and the network device has a function of realizing the behavior of the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the network device includes a processor and a transceiver, and the processor is configured to support the network device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing method.
  • the transceiver is configured to support communication between a network device and a terminal device, and send the information or instructions involved in the above method to the terminal device, or receive the information or instructions involved in the above method sent by the terminal device.
  • the network device may further include a memory, which is configured to be coupled to the processor, and stores program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, and the terminal device has a function of implementing the behavior of the terminal device in the foregoing method design.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the modules may be software and / or hardware.
  • the structure of the terminal device includes a transceiver and a processor, and the transceiver is configured to support the terminal device to send or receive data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
  • the processor is configured to determine the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, including: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are run in a device for determining a transmission block size, causing the device for determining a transmission block size to execute the foregoing
  • a computer-readable storage medium including: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are run in a device for determining a transmission block size, causing the device for determining a transmission block size to execute the foregoing
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product including instructions.
  • the computer program product runs in a device for determining a transmission block size
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is caused to execute the first aspect to the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing functions of a network device or a terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device described in the third aspect or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the first aspect to determine a transmission block size, and The network device described in the fourth aspect or an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that supports the network device to implement the method described in the second aspect;
  • the communication system includes the terminal device described in the seventh aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifth aspect to determine a transmission block size, and the network device described in the eighth aspect or a support network device to implement the sixth aspect Means for determining the transmission block size of the described method;
  • the communication system includes the terminal device described in the ninth aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to determine the transmission block size for implementing the method described in the first aspect or the fifth aspect, and the network device described in the tenth aspect or an implementation that supports the network device.
  • the names of the terminal device, network device, and device for determining the size of the transmission block do not limit the device itself. In actual implementation, these devices may appear under other names. As long as the functions of each device are similar to the embodiments of the present application, they belong to the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method, for example,
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method, such as the apparatus for determining a transmission block size.
  • the chip system is included, and the method includes: after receiving data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times, determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units , Decoding the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS.
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents pre-configuration or downlink control information (DCI) indicating that the bearer is repeatedly sent at the first time
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size.
  • the method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method, such as
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method, such as the apparatus for determining a transmission block size.
  • the chip system is included, and the method includes: firstly determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and then repeatedly sending the S bearer at the first time according to the first TBS Data on the symbol corresponding to the unit, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents pre-configuration or DCI indicates that the bearer corresponding to the first time unit is repeatedly sent The number of times on the symbol; S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
  • the method before determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, The method further includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units; if the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, determining M according to the code rate threshold , M ⁇ K, and the first TBS determined according to M acts on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit that is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  • the reference code rate is a code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS
  • the first code rate is a code rate indicated by the network device
  • the first modulation order is a modulation order indicated by the network device.
  • M is the largest positive integer that satisfies the reference code rate not greater than the code rate threshold.
  • the so-called "reference code rate” may refer to the code when transmitting the TB corresponding to the first TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit. rate.
  • the bit rate corresponding to a first time unit determined by the first TBS determined by M may refer to the time when the TB corresponding to the first TBS is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by the first time unit. Bit rate.
  • the bit rate when transmitting the TB corresponding to the first TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit can also be understood as the TB corresponding to the first TBS is carried on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit The number of bits during transmission.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • M K, and determine the first number according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units.
  • a TBS includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units; if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining a For one TBS, the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the bit rate corresponding to a first time unit according to the first TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  • the reference code rate is a code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS.
  • the first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
  • M K
  • the method further includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the K first time units, the reference code rate acting on a first TBS
  • the code rate corresponding to a time unit, the second code rate is indicated by the network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device; according to the resource element RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units
  • Determining the first TBS includes: if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, for determining the first TBS;
  • the first code rate is a code rate threshold, and according to the first
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the above fifteenth aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the fifteenth aspect.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines a transmission block size.
  • the device is a network device or a device that supports a network device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device to determine a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit.
  • the processing unit determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and decodes the first TBS corresponding to the first time unit received by the first TBS decoding receiving unit.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, where S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, and K is greater than Or an integer equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the sixteenth aspect.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting the terminal device that implements the method described in the tenth aspect.
  • the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or
  • the device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the sixteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit.
  • the processing unit determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, and K is greater than Or an integer equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
  • the apparatus for determining the transmission block size may further include a communication interface for repeatedly sending data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS determined by the processing unit, where S is an integer and S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units Determine the second TBS and the reference code rate. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, determine M according to the code rate threshold. Wherein, M ⁇ K, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the first TBS determined according to M is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. The reference code rate acts on the code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS.
  • the first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • M K
  • the processing unit is configured to: according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first bit rate, and the first
  • the modulation order determines the second TBS and the reference code rate. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the first TBS is determined according to a scale factor. The first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the first TBS is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  • the reference code rate acts on the code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS.
  • the first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the second bit rate, and the first The second modulation order determines the second TBS and the reference code rate.
  • the reference code rate acts on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit.
  • the second code rate is indicated by the network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device.
  • a processing unit configured to: if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determine the first TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and determine the first TBS
  • the first code rate is a code rate threshold, and according to the first TBS, the code rate corresponding to a first time unit is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • M is pre-configured, predefined, or indicated by DCI, and the first TBS determined according to M has a bit rate corresponding to a first time unit that is less than or equal to the code Rate threshold.
  • the duration of the first time unit is a maximum value or a minimum value of the durations of the K first time units.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, and the network device has a function of realizing the behavior of the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the network device includes a processor and a transceiver, and the processor is configured to support the network device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing method.
  • the transceiver is configured to support communication between a network device and a terminal device, and send the information or instructions involved in the above method to the terminal device, or receive the information or instructions involved in the above method sent by the terminal device.
  • the network device may further include a memory, which is configured to be coupled to the processor, and stores program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, and the terminal device has a function of realizing the behavior of the terminal device in the foregoing method design.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the modules may be software and / or hardware.
  • the structure of the terminal device includes a transceiver and a processor, and the transceiver is configured to support the terminal device to send or receive data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
  • the processor is configured to determine the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, including: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are run in a device for determining a transmission block size, causing the device for determining a transmission block size to execute The method described in the above fifteenth to sixteenth aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product including instructions.
  • the computer program product runs in a device for determining a transmission block size
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is caused to execute the above-mentioned fifteenth aspect. To the method described in the sixteenth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing functions of a network device or a terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device described in the seventeenth aspect or a terminal device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • a communication system which includes the terminal device described in the seventeenth aspect or a terminal device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size.
  • the communication system includes the terminal device described in the nineteenth aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size, and the network device described in the twentieth aspect or an implementation that supports the network device. Means for determining the transport block size of the method described in the sixteenth aspect.
  • the names of the terminal device, network device, and device for determining the size of the transmission block do not limit the device itself. In actual implementation, these devices may appear under other names. As long as the functions of each device are similar to the embodiments of the present application, they belong to the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies.
  • FIG. 1 is an example diagram of a transmission block based on time slot repetition provided in the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is an exemplary diagram of a transmission block based on mini-slot repetition provided in the prior art
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example architecture of a mobile communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is an exemplary diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a first flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 is a first exemplary diagram of data transmission based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a third example of transmission data based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is an example diagram of a DMRS transmission provided in the prior art.
  • FIG. 10 is a second flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 11 is a fourth example of transmission data based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is an example of a repeated transmission data based on mini-slots according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a first structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 14 is a second structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a composition example diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a composition example diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a third flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a fifth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 20 is a third structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 21 is a fourth structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a composition example of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a composition example diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used as examples, illustrations or illustrations. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of the words “exemplary” or “for example” is intended to present the relevant concept in a concrete manner.
  • the International Telecommunication Union defines three major application scenarios for 5G and future mobile communication systems: enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra-reliable, and low-latency communication. communications (URLLC) and mass machine type communications (mMTC).
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • URLLC ultra-reliable
  • mMTC mass machine type communications
  • Typical eMBB services are: ultra-high-definition video, augmented reality (AR), virtual reality (VR), etc.
  • the main characteristics of these services are large amount of data transmitted and high transmission rate.
  • Typical mMTC services are: smart grid power distribution automation, smart cities, etc.
  • the main characteristics are the huge number of connected devices, the small amount of data transmitted, and the data not sensitive to transmission delay.
  • These mMTC terminals need to meet low cost and very long standby The need for time.
  • Typical URLLC services are: wireless control in industrial manufacturing or production processes, motion control of driverless cars and drones, and haptic interaction applications such as remote repair and remote surgery.
  • the main characteristics of these services are ultra-high reliability. It has low latency, low transmission data volume and burstiness.
  • vehicle-to-external information exchange V2X
  • V2X vehicle-to-external information exchange
  • end-to-end delay 5 milliseconds (millisecond, ms)
  • power distribution needs a reliability of 99.9999%.
  • the end-to-end delay is 5ms; the reliability of Factory Automation is 99.9999%, and the end-to-end delay is 2ms.
  • the amount of data to be sent by the terminal device and the amount of data to be received by the network device need to be aligned and understood.
  • This data amount can be determined by using the transport block size size, TBS).
  • TBS transport block size size
  • a transport block (transport block, TB) refers to data carried once and transmitted on time-frequency resources.
  • data transmitted on each time-frequency resource may be referred to as a repetition.
  • N RE ′ represents the number of REs in a time slot
  • PRB Physical resource block
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • Q m is a modulation order
  • R is a code rate
  • Q m and R are values indicated by a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) field in downlink control information (DCI). Get the table in the agreement.
  • represents the mother code rate.
  • N info ⁇ 3824 by formula four Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; if N info > 3824, use formula 5 Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, If the bit rate R ⁇ 1 / 4, among them, otherwise, among them, C represents the number of coding blocks.
  • TBS is determined by the time-frequency resources scheduled by PDSCH or PUSCH, and the code rate and modulation order included in MCS.
  • the time-frequency resources of the PDSCH / PUSCH scheduling required for calculation refer to symbols in one time slot in the time domain.
  • the above protocol may be NR R15.
  • NR R15 protocol 38.214 According to the regulations of NR R15, one slot includes 14 symbols.
  • the maximum number of coincidence numbers used to calculate TBS may be 14.
  • the NR R15 protocol supports slot-based repetition transmission of data.
  • the network device is configured with a preset number of repetitions K in advance, and the terminal device transmits the same transport block on the same symbol allocated in each of the K consecutive time slots. Understandably, the transport blocks transmitted on the same symbol allocated in each time slot in the K time slots have the same size and the same content.
  • FIG. 1 is an example diagram of a transmission block based on time slot repetition provided in the prior art. As shown in FIG. 1, time slot n and time slot n + 1 are two consecutive arbitrary time slots, time slot n includes 14 symbols, and time slot n + 1 includes 14 symbols.
  • symbols 4 to 11 included in slot n are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the first time
  • symbols 4 to 11 included in slot n + 1 are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the second time.
  • the data transmitted from symbols 4 to 11 included in each time slot can be considered as a transmission block.
  • the data content of symbols 4 to 11 included in time slot n and the data transmitted from symbols 4 to 11 included in time slot n + 1 The data content is the same.
  • the smallest time scheduling unit is a transmission time interval (TTI) with a duration of 1 ms.
  • TTI transmission time interval
  • 5G supports both the granularity of time-domain scheduling at the time unit level and the granularity of time-domain scheduling at the micro-time unit, as well as meeting the delay requirements of different services.
  • the time unit is mainly used for eMBB services
  • the micro time unit is mainly used for URLLC services.
  • time unit and micro time unit are general terms, and a specific example may be that a time unit may be called a time slot, and a micro time unit may be called a micro time slot or a non-slot -based) or mini-slot; or, the time unit may be referred to as a sub-frame, and the micro-time unit may be referred to as a micro-subframe; other similar time-domain resource division methods are not limited.
  • time slots and mini time slots are used as examples.
  • a time slot may include, for example, 14 time domain symbols.
  • a mini time slot includes less than 14 time domain symbols, such as 2, 3, 4, and 5.
  • a time slot may include, for example, 7 time domain symbols, and a mini time slot includes less than 7 time domain symbols, such as 2 or 4, and the specific value is not limited.
  • the time domain symbols here may be orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • FIG. 2 is an exemplary diagram of a mini-slot repeat based transmission block provided in the prior art. As shown in FIG.
  • the time slot n includes 14 symbols
  • the mini time slot includes 4 symbols
  • K 2
  • the symbols 4 to 7 included in the time slot n are the first mini time slots for the first time.
  • Data corresponding to TB is transmitted.
  • Symbols 8 to 11 included in slot n are the second mini-slots, which are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the second time.
  • the data transmitted every 4 symbols can be considered as a transport block.
  • the time-domain resources required for mini-slots repetition may not exceed one time slot, that is, the upper limit of the time-domain symbols prescribed by the prior art calculation TBS cannot be reached. For example, if a mini-slot is 2 symbols and the number of configuration repetitions is 4 times, a total of 8 symbols are required to complete the transmission, which is less than one slot (14 symbols). Therefore, when repeatedly transmitting data based on the mini-slot, it is not necessary to calculate and obtain the TBS based on the mini-slot repetition completely according to the calculation method of the TBS based on the timeslot repetition. Therefore, the technical problem to be solved in this application is how to determine a TBS based on mini-slot repetition.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a TBS.
  • the basic principle is that the sending device determines the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units. Data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit. Then, after receiving the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, the receiving device determines the TBS according to the RE number and modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, and decodes the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS. Data.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times that the pre-configured data is repeatedly transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit
  • S is an integer.
  • S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions of the preset number of repetitions based on mini-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS.
  • the first time unit described in the embodiment of the present application may be the above-mentioned micro time unit, micro time slot, non-time slot, or mini time slot
  • the second time unit may be the above time unit.
  • the sending device may be a terminal device, and the receiving device may be a base station, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly sent S times is uplink data;
  • the sending device may be a base station and receive The device may be a terminal device, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly for S times is downlink data.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary architecture of a mobile communication system that can be applied to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mobile communication system includes a core network device 301, a network device 302, and at least one terminal device (such as a terminal device 303 and a terminal device 304 shown in FIG. 3).
  • the terminal device is connected to the network device in a wireless manner, and the network device is connected to the core network device in a wireless or wired manner.
  • the core network device and the network device may be separate physical devices, or the functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the network device may be integrated on the same physical device, or a physical device may be integrated with part of the core network.
  • the functions of the device and the functions of some network devices may be separate physical devices, or the functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the network device may be integrated on the same physical device, or a physical device may be integrated with part of the core network. The functions of the device and the functions of some network devices.
  • the terminal equipment can be fixed or removable.
  • FIG. 3 is only a schematic diagram.
  • the mobile communication system may further include other network devices, such as a wireless relay device and a wireless backhaul device, which are not shown in FIG. 3.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of core network devices, network devices, and terminal devices included in the mobile communication system.
  • the terminal device may be a wireless terminal device capable of receiving network device scheduling and instruction information.
  • the wireless terminal device may be a device that provides voice and / or data connectivity to the user, or a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or connected to Wireless modem other processing equipment.
  • a wireless terminal device can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via a wireless access network (eg, radio access network, RAN).
  • the wireless terminal device can be a mobile terminal device, such as a mobile phone (or a "cellular" phone) , Mobile phone (phone), computer and data card, for example, can be portable, compact, handheld, computer built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, they exchange languages and / or data with the wireless access network.
  • a wireless terminal device may also be called a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a mobile station (MS), a remote station, and an access point ( access point (AP), remote terminal device (remote terminal), access terminal device (access terminal), user terminal device (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user station (subscriber station (SS), user terminal device (customer premises equipment (CPE)), terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), and so on.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • Pads tablets Computers
  • a wireless terminal device may also be called a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a mobile station (MS), a remote station, and an access point ( access point (AP), remote terminal device (remote terminal), access terminal device (access terminal), user terminal device (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user station
  • the terminal device can be a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical surgery, or a smart grid.
  • the network device may be a base station (BS), a base station controller, or an evolved base station (eNodeB), etc. for wireless communication. It can also be called a wireless access point, a transceiver station, a relay station, a cell, a transmit and receive point (TRP), and so on.
  • a network device is a device that is deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices.
  • the network equipment may include various forms of cellular base stations, home base stations, cells, wireless transmission points, macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, wireless access points, and so on.
  • the names of devices with network device capabilities may vary. For example, in a 5G NR system, it is called a 5G base station (generation NodeB, gNB), and so on.
  • the names of network devices may change.
  • the network device may be another device that provides a wireless communication function for the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • a device that provides a wireless communication function for a terminal device is referred to as a network device.
  • FIG. 4 is an exemplary diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the base station and the terminal devices 1 to 6 constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal devices 1 to 6 can send uplink data to the base station, and the base station receives the uplink data sent by the terminal devices 1 to 6.
  • the base station may also send downlink data to terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6, and terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6 receive the downlink data.
  • the terminal devices 4 to 6 may also constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal device 5 may receive uplink information sent by the terminal device 4 or the terminal device 6, and the terminal device 5 sends the downlink information to the terminal device 4 or the terminal device 6.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; it can also be deployed on the water; it can also be deployed on air planes, balloons and satellites.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of the network device and the terminal device.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment and between terminal equipment and terminal equipment can communicate through licensed spectrum (unlicensed spectrum), can also communicate through unlicensed spectrum (unlicensed spectrum), or both through licensed spectrum and unlicensed spectrum Communication.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used between the network device and the terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be applied to downlink signal transmission, can also be applied to uplink signal transmission, and can also be applied to device-to-device (D2D) signal transmission.
  • D2D signal transmission the sending device is a terminal device, and the corresponding receiving device is also a terminal device.
  • the sending device is a terminal device, and the corresponding receiving device is a network device.
  • the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly sent S times according to the TBS is uplink data.
  • the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device.
  • the TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data.
  • FIG. 5 is a first flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first time unit is a mini time slot and the second time unit is a time slot.
  • the time domain resources required to repeatedly transmit data based on mini-slots are in one slot.
  • the method may include:
  • the terminal device determines the TBS according to the number of REs included in the M mini-slots and the modulation and coding method.
  • K represents the number of times that the pre-configured data is repeatedly transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot.
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the preset number of repetitions K can be configured in advance through high-level parameters, and the high-level parameter can be repK.
  • the preset number of repetitions K may also be dynamically indicated by the DCI.
  • K is used as an example to describe the preset number of repetitions. Depending on the number of symbols included in the mini-slot, the preset number of repetitions K can take different values.
  • one slot includes 14 symbols.
  • the preset number of repetitions K may be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
  • 2 mini-slots include 2 symbols
  • 3 mini-slots include 6 symbols
  • 4 mini-slots include 8 symbols
  • 5 mini-slots include 10 symbols
  • 6 mini-slots include 12 symbols
  • 7 The mini-slot includes 14 symbols.
  • the mini-slot includes 3 symbols
  • the preset number of repetitions K may be 2, 3, or 4.
  • the mini-slot includes 4 symbols
  • the preset number of repetitions K may be 2 or 3.
  • the mini-slot includes 5 symbols
  • the preset number of repetitions K may be 2.
  • the mini-slot includes 6 symbols
  • the preset number of repetitions K may be two.
  • the mini-slot includes 7 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be two.
  • N RE ′′ represents the number of REs included in the K mini-slots
  • Time domain units can also be called time units, Represents the number of symbols occupied by all PUSCH or PDSCH repeated in K mini-slots.
  • N info ⁇ 3824 by formula four Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; or, if N info > 3824, use formula 5 Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, If the bit rate R ⁇ 1 / 4, among them, otherwise, among them, C represents the number of coding blocks.
  • the TBS can be obtained through the above formulas 3 to 5, but also the TBS can be obtained by looking up a table according to the RE number and modulation and coding mode. Specifically, the TBS is obtained by querying a transport block size table (transport block size table, TBST) according to an index used to calculate the RE number of the TBS and the modulation and coding method. As shown in Table 1.
  • a transport block size table transport block size table, TBST
  • TBS TBS in Table 1 above is determined by the modulation and coding mode, the number of REs used to calculate the TBS, and the overhead.
  • N TBS N RE * coderate * Q m -overhead, and the calculated value is rounded up.
  • N TBS represents the value
  • N RE represents the RE number
  • coderate represents the target code rate
  • Q m represents the modulation order
  • overhead represents the overhead.
  • the overhead may be an overhead of a reference signal and / or a system loss.
  • the target bit rate and modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table in the NR R15 protocol 38.213. For example, as shown in Table 2.
  • miss means that the beginning of the entire resource is an uplink symbol and cannot transmit downlink data.
  • symbol 4 of slot n is an uplink symbol. If downlink data needs to be transmitted on symbol 4, you need to miss the entire slot n.
  • the so-called miss means that the beginning of the entire resource is a downlink symbol and cannot transmit uplink data.
  • the entire resource is a grant-free resource.
  • the so-called transmission timing can be understood as the timing of transmitting a copy, and the copy can refer to data that needs to be transmitted repeatedly.
  • the first transmission timing refers to the first transmission timing.
  • the first copy refers to the first transmitted data.
  • the first transmission opportunity in K is t, and the first transmission opportunity is the first time to send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • the first symbol of the first copy in the first mini slot cannot be sent if the first copy is repeatedly transmitted based on the mini slot, such as the first of the first mini slot
  • the symbol is a downlink symbol. If uplink data cannot be transmitted, the first copy can be postponed to the next transmission opportunity (such as the first symbol of the second mini-slot), and so on until the first copy can be transmitted.
  • Mini time slot If the transmission timing is not determined in the time slot where the K mini-slots are located, then the transmission time is determined in the next time slot. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, symbol 4 of the first mini-slot in slot n is an uplink symbol. If downlink data needs to be transmitted on symbol 4, you need to miss the first mini-slot and wait for it to arrive. In the second mini-slot, if the symbol 8 of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, downlink data can be transmitted on the symbol 8 of the second mini-slot.
  • the number of symbols included in the K mini-slots is grant-based, that is, the time domain resource selected when determining the TBS is K in one slot.
  • the number of symbols included in the K mini-slots is based on grant-free.
  • the time-domain resource selected when determining the TBS is required for K repetitions in a slot.
  • the time-frequency resources whose so-called "required" number of symbols are K repetitions are not dynamically scheduled by the network equipment, but are transmitted directly on the pre-configured scheduling-free time-frequency resources. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG.
  • the actual number of repetitions is four.
  • a fourth copy can be transmitted using the fifth mini-slot.
  • K copies are actually transmitted, and the symbols occupied by the K mini-slots may span two slots.
  • the number of repetitions is 4 times.
  • the last two symbols used by the second transport block, and the symbols used by the third transport block and the fourth transport block are the symbols in time slot n + 1.
  • the packet error rate of the actual number of repetitions is less than the pre-configured number of packets.
  • the block error rate (BLER) of one transmission is 10 -1
  • the packet error rate of 10 -4 can be achieved through four repetitions.
  • the actual number of repetitions is 3 times, and only a reliable packet error rate of 10 -3 can be achieved. Therefore, when the number of pre-configured repetitions cannot be guaranteed, the reliability of the transmission is affected.
  • data is repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slots to realize the flexibility of the starting point of transmission.
  • K repeated transmissions can also be implemented, or K-t +1 transmission guarantees the reliability of the transmission when the pre-configured repetition times are guaranteed, which can effectively improve the reliability. Even if the actual number of repetitions is less than the number of pre-configured repetitions, the reliability of the transmission is higher than the reliability when the number of pre-configured repetitions is reduced in the prior art.
  • the area with the first possible implementation manner described above lies in that when determining the number of REs included in K mini-slots, the number of symbols occupied by all PUSCH or PDSCH repeated in 1 mini-slot is used.
  • Other methods for the steps reference may be made to the detailed description in the first possible implementation manner, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • DMRS sharing DMRS sharing
  • the units of mini-slots are small, generally 2, 4, or 7 symbols. If 1 to 2 symbols in the symbols included in the mini-slot are also used to carry the DMRS, the overhead for mini-slot scheduling is excessive. Therefore, a method of sharing DMRS (DMRS sharing) is proposed. Specifically, there is no need to configure or schedule DMRS for each mini-slot, but configure or schedule DMRS for one mini-slot. Several mini-slots share this DMRS, and the receiving device performs channel estimation on the physical channel after receiving the DMRS.
  • the DMRS is configured in the first symbol of the first mini-slot and the third mini-slot, respectively, and the second mini-slot can share the first of the first mini-slot
  • the fourth mini-slot can share the first symbol-configured DMRS in the third mini-slot, so that the receiving device can correctly demodulate the PUCCH or PUSCH carried on the aforementioned mini-slots.
  • the mini-slots carrying DMRS and the TBSs that do not carry DMRS are different.
  • the associated mini-slot based on the mini-slot repetition may be configured with an associated scaling factor, and the scaling factor is related to whether the symbols on the associated mini-slot have a symbol bearing DMRS. For example, after determining the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in a mini-slot and the modulation and coding method, if the symbols corresponding to the P mini-slots carry DMRS, adjust the TBS according to the first scale factor to obtain the first adjusted TBS. , The first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K.
  • the TBS is adjusted according to the second scale factor to obtain the second adjusted TBS, and the second scale factor is less than 1.
  • the scaling factor may be pre-configured through high-level parameters, or may be dynamically indicated by DCI. Therefore, it is guaranteed that when the number of REs included in a mini-slot is used to calculate the TBS based on the mini-slot repetition, the TBS obtained by multiplying the TBS of the replica by the scale factor is consistent with the average TBS of all duplicate replicas.
  • the adjusted TBS is used as the TBS based on mini-slot repetition.
  • the terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the number of bits corresponding to the TBS is mapped to the symbol corresponding to a mini-slot, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted S times through the S mini-slots.
  • S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  • the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot can be repeatedly sent K times based on the pre-configured repetition times, or it can be repeatedly sent based on the mini-slot based on the pre-configured repetitions.
  • S represents the actual number of repetitive transmissions of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot in the time slot.
  • the network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the network device determines the TBS according to the number of REs included in the M mini-slots and the modulation and coding mode.
  • the network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the TBS.
  • Data can be demodulated and decoded according to the modulation and coding mode.
  • modulation and coding mode For details, reference may be made to the existing technology, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the main difference between repeated transmission of data based on mini-slots and repeated transmission of data based on time-slots is that, first, the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots can be transmitted in consecutive time slots, and at different times. The symbols used in the slot transmission are different. Second, the mini-slots used for repeated transmission of data on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots are also continuous. Third, there are at least two copies of a part or All.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size determines the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots and the modulation and coding method, or determines the transmission block according to the number of REs included in the mini-slot and the modulation and coding method. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on mini-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used in calculating the TBS.
  • the time domain resources required for repeated transmission of data based on mini time slots may also exceed the time frequency resources included in one time slot.
  • one slot includes 14 symbols. If the mini-slot includes 2 symbols, the preset number of repetitions K is at least 8 times. Correspondingly, the 8 mini-slots include 16 symbols, and the duration of the 8 mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 3 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 5 times. Correspondingly, the five mini-slots include 15 symbols, and the duration of the five mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot.
  • the mini-slot includes 4 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 4 times.
  • the mini-slot includes 5 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times.
  • the mini-slot includes 6 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times.
  • the mini-slot includes 7 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times.
  • FIG. 10 is a second flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may include:
  • the terminal device determines the TBS according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method.
  • the reference duration may be equal to the duration of the time slot.
  • the number of REs in a time slot can be determined according to the number of symbols scheduled by PUSCH or PDSCH in a time slot, and then the number of REs for calculating TBS is determined based on the number of REs in one time slot, and the RE for calculating TBS is calculated.
  • the number determines the TBS.
  • the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R mini-slots, where R is a maximum integer less than K and the reference duration is less than the duration of the timeslot.
  • three mini-slots can be determined according to the number of PUSCH or PDSCH scheduling symbols in one 3 mini-slot.
  • S501 is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the flexibility of the starting point of transmission can be achieved when data is repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slots.
  • the first transmission opportunity in K is t, and the first transmission opportunity is the first time to send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • t a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • R may be equal to three.
  • symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol
  • the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data
  • the first symbol (symbol 4) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol
  • t 2
  • the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data, as shown in Figure 12. And so on until it is deferred to a mini-slot capable of transmitting the first copy.
  • the preset number of repetitions K is at least 8 times.
  • R may be equal to 7.
  • the mini-slot includes 3 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 5 times.
  • t 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data.
  • R may be equal to 4.
  • symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol
  • symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol
  • the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data
  • the terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the number of bits corresponding to the TBS is mapped to the symbol corresponding to a mini-slot, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted S times through the S mini-slots.
  • S is an integer
  • S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  • the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot can be repeatedly sent K times based on the pre-configured repetition times, or it can be repeatedly sent based on the mini-slot based on less than the pre-configured repetitions.
  • Data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot Data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot.
  • the network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the network device determines the TBS according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method.
  • the network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the TBS.
  • the TBS when the duration of the K mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot, the TBS can be determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method.
  • the symbol occupied by all transmission blocks or a part of transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions of a mini-slot repeat is calculated as TBS.
  • the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device.
  • the TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data.
  • the execution bodies of FIG. 5 and FIG. 10 may be interchanged. For detailed explanation, reference may be made to the method steps shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 10. More details.
  • each network element such as a terminal device and a network device, includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
  • functional modules may be divided into terminal equipment and network equipment according to the foregoing method examples.
  • functional modules may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
  • FIG. 13 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments.
  • FIG. 1 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment to determine a transmission block size.
  • the device for determining a transmission block size may be a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 1301, a sending unit 1302, and a receiving unit 1303.
  • the processing unit 1301 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform a method described in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1301 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S501 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1001 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
  • the sending unit 1302 is configured to send data.
  • the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S502 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1002 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG.
  • the receiving unit 1303 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving unit 1303 is configured to receive data.
  • the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S503 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and the method in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1003.
  • a processing unit 1301 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S504 and S505 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and S1004 and S100 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1005.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
  • the physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
  • FIG. 14 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments.
  • FIG. 2 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by a network device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application.
  • the device for determining the size of a transmission block is a network device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports the method provided in the embodiment by the network device.
  • the device for determining the size of the transmission block may be a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 1401, a sending unit 1402, and a receiving unit 1403.
  • the receiving unit 1403 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving unit 1403 is configured to receive data.
  • the device for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S503 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1003.
  • the processing unit 1401 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S504 and S505 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and S1004 and S100 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1005.
  • the processing unit 1401 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1401 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S501 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1001 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
  • the sending unit 1402 is configured to send data.
  • the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S502 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1002 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
  • the physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
  • FIG. 15 shows a possible structural diagram of a network device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the network device includes a transmitter / receiver 1501, a controller / processor 1502, and a memory 1503.
  • the transmitter / receiver 1501 is configured to support transmitting and receiving information between a network device and the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the controller / processor 1502 performs various functions for communicating with a terminal device.
  • the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, mediated by the receiver 1501, and further processed by the controller / processor 1502 to recover the service data and signaling information sent by the terminal device .
  • the service data and signaling messages are processed by the controller / processor 1502 and mediated by the transmitter 1501 to generate a downlink signal and transmitted to the terminal device via the antenna.
  • the controller / processor 1502 also performs the processing procedures involving network devices in FIG. 5 and FIG. 10 and / or other procedures for the techniques described in this application.
  • the memory 1503 is configured to store program code and data of a network device.
  • FIG. 16 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of the terminal device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal device includes a transmitter 1601, a receiver 1602, a controller / processor 1603, a memory 1604, and a modem processor 1605.
  • the transmitter 1601 is configured to send an uplink signal (send data transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly S times), and the uplink signal is transmitted to the network device described in the foregoing embodiment via an antenna.
  • the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the network device in the above embodiment (repeatedly sending S data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit).
  • the receiver 1602 is configured to receive a downlink signal received from an antenna (S times is carried on data on a symbol corresponding to a first time unit).
  • the encoder 1606 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages.
  • the modulator 1607 further processes (e.g., symbol maps and modulates) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples.
  • a demodulator 1609 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates.
  • the decoder 1608 processes (e.g., decodes) the symbol estimates and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device.
  • the encoder 1606, the modulator 1607, the demodulator 1609, and the decoder 1608 may be implemented by a synthesized modem processor 1605. These units process according to the radio access technology used by the radio access network.
  • the controller / processor 1603 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. For example, it is used to control the terminal device to determine the TBS according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and to decode the data on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit and / or other processes of the technology described in this application according to the TBS. As an example, the controller / processor 1603 is configured to support the terminal device to execute the process S501 in FIG. 5 and the process S1001 in FIG. 10.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which may implement or The disclosed methods, steps and logic block diagrams in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as Random-access memory (RAM).
  • the memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing program instructions and / or data.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be divided.
  • the combination can either be integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal, or another programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like that includes one or more available medium integration.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, an SSD).
  • the TBS is determined according to K transmission occasions, the time-frequency resources occupied by the K transmission occasions and the modulation and coding method indicated by the network device, the TBS is determined, and the determined TBS corresponds to TB is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity, and the transmission bit rate can be obtained.
  • the transmission bit rate can also be understood as the number of bits when transmitting the TB corresponding to the TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a transmission opportunity.
  • the bit rate threshold can be the maximum number of bits that can be carried by the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission occasion.
  • the transmission bit rate may be greater than the bit rate threshold.
  • the code rate threshold is 1
  • the maximum data packet that can be carried by the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity is 100 bits. If the transmission code rate is 1.2 and a 120-bit data packet needs to be transmitted, the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity cannot completely transmit the 120-bit data packet. Incomplete transmission of the data packet will cause the receiver to fail to decode. One retransmission, thereby reducing transmission efficiency and increasing transmission delay.
  • the TBS needs to be recalculated so that the reference code rate when the TB corresponding to the TBS is transmitted on a time-frequency resource occupied by a transmission opportunity is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  • the transmission timing may be understood as a time unit, and the time unit may be one or two or more OFDM symbols.
  • the time unit may also refer to a transmission opportunity or a mini-slot.
  • the first time unit is a mini-slot.
  • the time domain resources required to repeatedly transmit data based on mini-slots are in one slot. The method of re-determining the size of the transport block is described in detail below using the upper line signal transmission as an example.
  • FIG. 17 is a third flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17, the method may include:
  • the terminal device determines the first TBS and the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K mini-slots.
  • the terminal device determines the first TBS according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots and the first modulation and coding mode.
  • K mini-slots can also be understood as K transmission opportunities.
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times that the pre-configuration or DCI dynamic indication repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot.
  • the network device uses the DCI dynamic indication or the number of repetitions K configured by a high-level parameter, and the PUSCH is repeatedly transmitted on the time-frequency resources corresponding to the K transmission opportunities.
  • the first modulation and coding mode may be indicated by the network device.
  • the first modulation and coding method may be used to indicate a first code rate and a first modulation order.
  • the first modulation and coding scheme may be MCS index 9. As shown in Table 3, the modulation order indicated by MCS index 9 is 2, that is, the first modulation order is 2, and the code rate indicated by MCS index 9 is 251/1024, that is, the first code rate is 251/1024.
  • N TBS cd * K * N RE * Q m
  • N TBS represents the value of TBS
  • cd represents the bit rate, for example, the first bit rate
  • N RE represents a The number of REs included in the mini-slot, or N RE is used to indicate the number of REs included in one mini-slot to transmit data or control information
  • Q m represents the modulation order, for example, the first modulation order.
  • Equation 8 can be summarized as: It can be concluded that the reference code rate can be K times the first code rate. However, when sending a TB corresponding to the first TBS in a mini-slot, the reference code rate may be greater than the code rate threshold.
  • the bit rate threshold may be a maximum value in an MCS table of an existing protocol (3GPP TS 38.214 v15.3.0, section 6.1.4.1).
  • the target code rate indicated by MCS index 27 in the MCS table is 772/1024.
  • 1004/1024 is greater than 772/1024, that is, the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold.
  • the code rate threshold may also be a predefined or pre-configured code rate.
  • a predefined or pre-configured code rate For example, 0.95, 1, 1.33, 1.67.
  • pre-defined may refer to a device written in advance according to a protocol.
  • pre-configuration may refer to a network device to indicate in advance.
  • the TBS should be recalculated, instead of calculating the TBS with K transmission timing resources, and using the M transmission timing resources, M ⁇ K, and the first TBS determined according to M acts on
  • the code rate corresponding to a mini-slot is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  • M is the largest positive integer that satisfies the reference code rate not greater than the code rate threshold.
  • the so-called "reference code rate" can be understood as the code rate when the TB corresponding to the first TBS is carried on the time-frequency resource occupied by a mini-slot. Go to S1702.
  • the terminal device determines M according to a code rate threshold.
  • N ′ TBS represents the number of REs included in the M mini-slots, the first bit rate, and the first The value of TBS determined by the modulation order.
  • cd indicates the code rate, for example, the first code rate
  • N RE indicates the number of REs included in a mini-slot
  • N RE indicates the number of REs included in a mini-slot for transmitting data or control information
  • Q m indicates Modulation order, for example, the first modulation order. If the first modulation order is guaranteed to be constant, formula 9 can be summarized as: Among them, the condition that M should satisfy is Among them, cd max represents a code rate threshold. Therefore, it is guaranteed that the reference code rate is not greater than the code rate threshold.
  • the bit rate threshold is 772/1024, and the calculated TBS is:
  • the reference code rate is,
  • bit rate threshold exceeds 772/1024, the TBS needs to be determined again.
  • the code rate threshold is a predefined or pre-configured code rate.
  • the bit rate threshold is 0.95.
  • M can also be predefined, pre-configured, or dynamically indicated by DCI, without requiring the terminal device to calculate the value of M.
  • the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot may also be used to calculate the TBS using the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots.
  • the code rate threshold is preset to 772/1024
  • the MCS index is 13
  • the first code rate is 526/1024
  • the first modulation order is 2
  • K 2
  • the time domain length of a mini-slot is 2 symbols.
  • the frequency domain resource is a physical resource block (Physical Resource Block, PRB).
  • PRB Physical Resource Block
  • the TBS is recalculated. Calculate TBS using the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot instead of the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots:
  • the terminal device determines the second TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the M mini-slots.
  • N RE ′′ represents the number of REs included in the M mini-slots
  • N info ⁇ 3824 by formula four Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; or, if N info > 3824, use formula 5 Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where, If the bit rate R ⁇ 1 / 4, among them, otherwise, among them, C represents the number of coding blocks.
  • the terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
  • S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  • the network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the network device may first determine the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the K mini-slots.
  • the detailed description of S1701 is not repeated here in the embodiment of the present application. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, then M is determined according to the code rate threshold. For a specific explanation, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1702, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device determines the second TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
  • Data can be demodulated and decoded according to the modulation and coding mode.
  • modulation and coding mode For details, reference may be made to the existing technology, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • FIG. 18 is a fourth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18, the method may include:
  • the terminal device determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first adjustment order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the terminal device determines a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units.
  • the reference code rate acts on a mini-slot corresponding to Bit rate.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot
  • M K.
  • the network device uses the DCI dynamic indication or the number of repetitions K configured by a high-level parameter, and the PUSCH is repeatedly transmitted on the time-frequency resources corresponding to the K transmission opportunities.
  • the first modulation and coding mode may be indicated by the network device.
  • the first modulation and coding method may be used to indicate a first code rate and a first modulation order.
  • the first modulation and coding scheme may be MCS index 9. As shown in Table 3, the modulation order indicated by MCS index 9 is 2, that is, the first modulation order is 2, and the code rate indicated by MCS index 9 is 251/1024, that is, the first code rate is 251/1024.
  • N TBS cd * K * N RE * Q m
  • N TBS represents the value of TBS
  • cd represents the bit rate, for example, the first bit rate
  • N RE represents a The number of REs included in the mini-slot
  • Q m represents the modulation order, for example, the first modulation order.
  • the first TBS may be determined according to a scale factor, and the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS.
  • the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the code rate corresponding to a mini time slot acting on the first TBS is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  • the scale factor may be indicated by a high-level parameter or DCI.
  • the terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the first TBS.
  • the network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the network device determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the network device After receiving the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots for S times, the network device determines the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the K first time units. For specific explanation, refer to S1801. The detailed description is omitted in the embodiments of the present application. If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, execute S1805.
  • the network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the first TBS.
  • the scale factor may be dynamically indicated by DCI.
  • the scale factor can be configured by high-level parameters, or activated by DCI indication (activation DCI).
  • activ DCI DCI indication
  • the scale factor need not be considered, or the terminal device considers the scale factor to be 1. If the scale factor is greater than 0.5 and the adjusted code rate is still greater than the code rate threshold, recalculate TBS and use the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot instead of the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots to calculate TBS .
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
  • FIG. 19 is a fifth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 19, the method may include:
  • the terminal device determines the first TBS and the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the terminal device determines the second TBS according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the second code rate used to determine the second TBS is a code rate threshold, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the second TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  • the second code rate is predefined or pre-configured.
  • the second modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table according to the second code rate.
  • the slot includes the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order to determine the first TBS.
  • the number of bits indicated by the first TBS is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by a mini-slot.
  • the reference code rate is 1052 / 1024, if the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, the second TBS is determined according to the second bit rate of 943/1024.
  • the terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
  • S1904 The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
  • the network device After receiving the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots S times, the network device determines the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the K first time units. For a specific explanation, refer to S1901 The detailed description is omitted in the embodiments of the present application. If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, execute S1905.
  • the network device determines the second TBS according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
  • the second code rate used to determine the second TBS is a code rate threshold, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the second TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  • the second code rate is predefined or pre-configured.
  • the second modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table according to the second code rate.
  • the network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
  • the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet.
  • the end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
  • the M used may be pre-configured, pre-defined, or DCI
  • the code rate indicated by the first TBS determined according to M and acting on a first time unit is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  • the mini-slot used to calculate whether the TBS exceeds the code rate threshold may be the shortest one of the K mini-slots.
  • the network device dynamically indicates or preconfigures the number of repetitions K to be 3, and the time domain length of each mini-slot is 2 symbols, 5 symbols, and 7 symbols respectively.
  • the MCS index dynamically indicated by the network device is 13, and the MCS index 13 corresponds
  • the modulation order is 2 and the code rate is 526/1024.
  • N RE can be a time-frequency resource determined according to (2 + 5 + 7) symbols.
  • N TBS The number of encoded bits represented by N TBS is carried in a mini-slot, and the three mini-slots are not of equal length, so the corresponding equivalent code rates are different.
  • N TBS is transmitted on a mini-slot of 2 symbols, with a reference code rate
  • the bit rate threshold pre-configured or indicated by the network device is 943/1024, and 3682/1024 is greater than 943/1024, so the TBS is calculated back.
  • the mini-slot used to calculate whether the TBS exceeds the code rate threshold may also be the longest one of the K mini-slots.
  • the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device.
  • the TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data.
  • the execution bodies in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 may be interchanged. For detailed explanation, reference may be made to the method steps shown in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19. More details.
  • each network element such as a terminal device and a network device, includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
  • functional modules may be divided into terminal equipment and network equipment according to the foregoing method examples.
  • functional modules may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
  • FIG. 20 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block involved in the above and embodiments.
  • FIG. 3 shows that the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block can execute Steps performed by the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application.
  • the device for determining the size of the transmission block is a terminal device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports the terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment.
  • the device for determining the size of the transmission block may be a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 2001, a sending unit 2002, and a receiving unit 2003.
  • the processing unit 2001 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 2001 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1701 to S1703 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. S1801 and S1901 to S1902 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
  • the sending unit 2002 is configured to send data.
  • the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1704 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17 and S1802 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18, S1903 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
  • the receiving unit 2003 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving unit 2003 is configured to receive data.
  • the device for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1705 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
  • the physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
  • FIG. 21 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments.
  • FIG. 4 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by a network device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application.
  • the device for determining the size of a transmission block is a network device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports a network device to implement the method provided in the embodiment.
  • the device for determining the size of a transmission block may be a chip system.
  • the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 2101, a sending unit 2102, and a receiving unit 2103.
  • the receiving unit 2103 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving unit 2103 is configured to receive data.
  • the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1705 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. S1803, S1904 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 2101 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 2101 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1701 to S1703 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 18 S1801, S1901 and S1902 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
  • a sending unit 2102 is configured to send data, for example, a device for supporting a determination of a transmission block size executes S1704 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17 and S1802 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18, S1903 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
  • the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
  • the physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
  • FIG. 22 shows a possible structural diagram of a network device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the network device includes a transmitter / receiver 2201, a controller / processor 2202, and a memory 2203.
  • the transmitter / receiver 2201 is configured to support transmitting and receiving information between a network device and the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the controller / processor 2202 performs various functions for communicating with a terminal device.
  • the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, mediated by the receiver 2201, and further processed by the controller / processor 2202 to recover the service data and signaling information sent by the terminal device .
  • the service data and signaling messages are processed by the controller / processor 2202 and mediated by the transmitter 2201 to generate downlink signals and transmitted to the terminal device via the antenna.
  • the controller / processor 2202 also performs the processing procedures involving network devices in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19 and / or other procedures for the techniques described in this application.
  • the memory 2203 is configured to store program code and data of a network device.
  • FIG. 23 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of the terminal device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal device includes a transmitter 2301, a receiver 2302, a controller / processor 2303, a memory 2304, and a modem processor 2305.
  • the transmitter 2301 is configured to send an uplink signal (repeatedly transmitting data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times), and the uplink signal is transmitted to the network device described in the foregoing embodiment via an antenna.
  • the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the network device in the above embodiment (repeatedly sending S data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit).
  • the receiver 2302 is configured to receive a downlink signal received from an antenna (S times is carried on data on a symbol corresponding to a first time unit).
  • the encoder 2306 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages.
  • the modulator 2307 further processes (e.g., symbol maps and modulates) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples.
  • a demodulator 2309 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates.
  • the decoder 2308 processes (e.g., decodes) the symbol estimates and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device.
  • the encoder 2306, the modulator 2307, the demodulator 2309, and the decoder 2308 may be implemented by a synthetic modem processor 2305. These units process according to the radio access technology used by the radio access network.
  • the controller / processor 2303 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. For example, it is used to control the terminal device to determine the TBS according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and to decode the data on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit and / or other processes of the technology described in this application according to the TBS. As an example, the controller / processor 2303 is used to support the terminal device to perform processes S1701 to S1703 in FIG. 17, process S1801 in FIG. 18, and process S1901 in FIG. 19.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which may implement or The disclosed methods, steps and logic block diagrams in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as Random-access memory (RAM).
  • the memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing program instructions and / or data.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be divided.
  • the combination can either be integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal, or another programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like that includes one or more available medium integration.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, an SSD).

Abstract

Disclosed are a method and apparatus for determining a transport block size, which relate to the field of communications and solve the problem of how to determine a repeat non-slot-based TBS. The specific solution is: that a sending device determines a TBS according to the number of REs comprised in M first time units and a modulation and coding method, and sends data that is carried on symbols corresponding to the first time units S times. A receiving device receives data that is carried on symbols corresponding to first time units S times, determines a TBS according to the number of REs comprised in M first time units and a modulation and coding method, and decodes, according to the TBS, the data that is carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of pre-configured times the data that is carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time units is repeatedly sent, S is an integer, and S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. The embodiments of the present application are applied in the process of determining a transport block size.

Description

一种确定传输块大小的方法及装置Method and device for determining transmission block size
本申请要求于2018年08月10日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201810911082.3、申请名称为“一种确定传输块大小的方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,本申请还要求于2019年01月11日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910028872.1、申请名称为“一种确定传输块大小的方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,这些申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed on August 10, 2018 with the State Intellectual Property Office, application number 201810911082.3, and application name "A Method and Device for Determining the Size of a Transmission Block". Priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on January 11, 2014, with application number 201910028872.1, and entitled "A Method and Device for Determining the Size of a Transmission Block", the entire contents of these applications are incorporated herein by reference. in.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种确定传输块大小的方法及装置。Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method and device for determining a transmission block size.
背景技术Background technique
为了应对未来爆炸性的移动数据流量增长、海量移动通信的设备连接、不断涌现的各类新业务和应用场景,第五代(the fifth generation,5G)移动通信系统应运而生。对于工业制造或生产流程中的无线控制、无人驾驶汽车和无人驾驶飞机的运动控制以及远程修理、远程手术等触觉交互类应用,国际电信联盟(international telecommunication union,ITU)定义了高可靠低时延通信(ultra reliable and low latency communications,URLLC)。URLLC业务的主要特点是要求超高可靠性、低延时,传输数据量较少以及具有突发性。In order to cope with the explosive growth of mobile data traffic in the future, the connection of massive mobile communication equipment, and the emergence of various new services and application scenarios, the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system has emerged at the historic moment. For wireless control in industrial manufacturing or production processes, motion control of driverless cars and drones, and haptic interaction applications such as remote repair and remote surgery, the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) defines high reliability and low reliability. Delay communication (ultra reliable and low communication) (URLLC). The main characteristics of the URLLC service are the requirement for ultra-high reliability, low latency, less data transmission, and burstiness.
在终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据的过程中,需要确定传输块大小(transport block size,TBS)。所谓传输块大小即在时频资源上承载的数据量(比特数)。在现有技术中,可以基于时隙(slot-based)重复传输数据,确定一个时隙中的TBS。但是,对于时延要求较高的URLLC场景,可以采用基于非时隙(non-slot-based)重复传输数据来满足低时延的特征。因此,如何确定基于非时隙重复的TBS是一个亟待解决的问题。In the process of transmitting data between a terminal device and a network device, a transport block size (TBS) needs to be determined. The so-called transport block size is the amount of data (bits) carried on the time-frequency resources. In the prior art, slot-based data can be repeatedly transmitted to determine the TBS in a time slot. However, for URLLC scenarios with high latency requirements, non-slot-based repeated transmission of data can be used to meet the characteristics of low latency. Therefore, how to determine the TBS based on non-slot repetition is an urgent problem.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种确定传输块大小的方法及装置,解决了如何确定基于非时隙重复的TBS的问题。The embodiments of the present application provide a method and a device for determining a transmission block size, which solves the problem of how to determine a TBS based on non-slot repetition.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例采用如下技术方案:To achieve the above purpose, the embodiments of the present application adopt the following technical solutions:
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:接收到S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据后,根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素(resource element,RE)数和调制编码方式确定TBS,根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。其中,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;M为大于或等于1,且小于或 等于K的整数。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method. The device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method. For example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes A chip system, the method includes: after receiving data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times, determining the TBS according to the number of resource elements (RE) and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and according to the TBS Decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit. Among them, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit; M is greater than Or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于非时隙重复的整体或部分计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送S次。从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:先根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,然后,根据TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method. The device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method. For example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes A chip system, the method includes: first determining the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, and then repeatedly transmitting the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS, where M is greater than Or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K is the number of times pre-configured retransmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit; S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1 And is less than or equal to K.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于非时隙重复的整体或部分计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送S次。从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
第三方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第一方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第一方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,以及根据TBS解码接收单元接收到的第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the first aspect. The device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the first aspect, for example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block. The device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the first aspect to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit is configured to determine the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit received by the receiving unit according to the TBS.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,用于接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。其中,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。Optionally, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times. Among them, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit; M is greater than Or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
第四方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第二方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第二方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the second aspect. The device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the second aspect. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block. The device is a network device or a device for supporting a network device that implements the method described in the second aspect to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit is configured to determine a TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,用于发送根据处理单元确定的TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。Optionally, the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface for sending the TBS determined according to the processing unit to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times. Among them, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit; S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
结合第一方面至第四方面中任一方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,即M=K。K中第一次传输时机为t,第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。With reference to any one of the first aspect to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the TBS is determined according to the number of REs and modulation and coding modes included in the K first time units, that is, M = K. The first transmission timing in K is t, and the first transmission timing is the first transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K .
根据第一次传输时机的不同,实际重复次数也可以不同。The actual number of repetitions may be different depending on the timing of the first transmission.
在一种可能的实现方式中,S=K-t+1,表示在第二时间单元内重复传输承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数。In a possible implementation manner, S = K-t + 1, which represents the actual number of repeated transmissions of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit in the second time unit.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,S=K,表示在第二时间单元内重复传输承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数。In another possible implementation manner, S = K, which represents the actual number of repetitions of repeatedly transmitting data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit in the second time unit.
结合第一方面至第二方面中任一方面,在另一种可能的实现方式中,根据1个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,即M=1。在根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小之后,包括:若P个第一时间单元对应的符号承载有解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS),根据第一标度因子调整TBS得到第一调整后的TBS,第一标度因子大于1,P为整数,P大于或等于1,且小于K。或者,若第一时间单元对应的所有符号用于承载物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH),根据第二标度因子调整TBS得到第二调整后的TBS,第二标度因子小于1。With reference to any one of the first aspect to the second aspect, in another possible implementation manner, the TBS is determined according to an RE number and a modulation and coding mode included in a first time unit, that is, M = 1. After determining the transmission block size according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding methods included in the M first time units, it includes: if the symbols corresponding to the P first time units carry a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), A scale factor adjusts the TBS to obtain a first adjusted TBS. The first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K. Or, if all symbols corresponding to the first time unit are used to carry a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or a physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)), adjust the TBS according to the second scaling factor to obtain the first After the second adjusted TBS, the second scale factor is less than 1.
结合第三方面至第四方面中任一方面,在另一种可能的实现方式中,根据1个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,即M=1。若P个第一时间单元对应的符号承载有DMRS,处理模块还用于,根据第一标度因子调整TBS得到第一调整后的TBS,第一标度因子大于1,P为整数,P大于或等于1,且小于K。或者,若第一时间单元对应的所有符号用于承载物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH),处理模块还用于,根据第二标度因子调整TBS得到第二调整后的TBS,第二标度因子小于1。With reference to any one of the third aspect to the fourth aspect, in another possible implementation manner, the TBS is determined according to an RE number and a modulation and coding mode included in a first time unit, that is, M = 1. If the symbols corresponding to the P first time units carry DMRS, the processing module is further configured to adjust the TBS according to the first scale factor to obtain the first adjusted TBS. The first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, and P is greater than Or equal to 1, and less than K. Alternatively, if all symbols corresponding to the first time unit are used to carry a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or a physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)), the processing module is further configured to: The TBS is adjusted by the degree factor to obtain a second adjusted TBS, and the second scale factor is less than 1.
从而,保证当选取1个第一时间单元包括的RE数用于计算基于第一时间单元重复的TBS时,该副本本身的TBS与标度因子相乘所得到的TBS与所有重复副本的平均TBS一致,用调整后的TBS来作为基于第一时间单元重复的TBS。所谓副本指承载在时频资源上传输一次的数据。Therefore, it is guaranteed that when the number of REs included in a first time unit is selected for calculating the TBS repeated based on the first time unit, the TBS of the copy itself is multiplied by the scale factor and the average TBS of all duplicate copies In agreement, the adjusted TBS is used as the TBS repeated based on the first time unit. The so-called copy refers to the data carried once transmitted on the time-frequency resource.
可选择的,在实际应用中,基于第一时间单元重复传输数据所需的时域资源也可以超过一个第二时间单元包括的时频资源。在这种情况下,M=K,即依然根据上述根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,并不适合,因为K个第一时间单元包括的RE数超过了一个第二时间单元包括的RE数。因此,本申请实施例还可以包括以下具体的实现方式。Alternatively, in practical applications, the time domain resources required for repeated transmission of data based on the first time unit may also exceed the time-frequency resources included in a second time unit. In this case, M = K, that is, the TBS is still determined according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding methods included in the K first time units, which is not suitable because the number of REs included in the K first time units exceeds one. The number of REs included in the second time unit. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application may further include the following specific implementation manners.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:M=K,接收到S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据后,当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。其中,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数。参考时长等于第二时间单元的时长;或者,参考时长等于R个第一时间单元的时长,R为小于K的最大整数,且参考时长小于第二时间单元的时长。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method may be applied to a terminal device, or the method may be applied to a device for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method. The device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method. For example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes Chip system, the method includes: M = K, after receiving S times of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, when the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, corresponding to the reference duration The RE number and modulation and coding mode determine the TBS, and the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is decoded according to the TBS. Among them, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents the number of times pre-configured and repeated transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit. The reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or, the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R first time units, R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than the duration of the second time unit.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于参考时长对应的RE数计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送K次。从而,能够在超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates a TBS based on the number of REs corresponding to the reference duration, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeats the transmission K times. Therefore, on the premise that the upper limit of the number of symbols used for calculating the TBS is exceeded, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all or a part of the transport blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:M=K,当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小,然后,根据TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,其中,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。参考时长等于第二时间单元的时长;或者,参考时长等于R个第一时间单元的时长,R为小于K的最大整数,且参考时长小于第二时间单元的时长。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method may be applied to a terminal device, or the method may be applied to a device for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method. The device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to a device for determining the transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method. For example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes Chip system, the method includes: M = K, when the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, the transmission block size is determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method, and then repeatedly transmitted according to the TBS S times of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of pre-configured retransmissions of data carried on the symbol of the first time unit; S is an integer, S Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. The reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or, the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R first time units, R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than the duration of the second time unit.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于参考时长对应的RE数计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送K次。从而,能够在超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates a TBS based on the number of REs corresponding to the reference duration, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeats the transmission K times. Therefore, on the premise that the upper limit of the number of symbols used for calculating the TBS is exceeded, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all or a part of the transport blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
第七方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第五方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,用于M=K,当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方 式确定TBS,并根据TBS解码接收单元接收到的第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the fifth aspect. The device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifth aspect, for example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines the size of the transmission block. The apparatus is a network device or an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that implements the method described in the fifth aspect by supporting a network device. For example, the apparatus for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit is used for M = K. When the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, the TBS is determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method, and received by the TBS decoding receiving unit. The data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,用于接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。Optionally, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times.
第八方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第六方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,用于M=K,当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the sixth aspect. The device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the sixth aspect. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or a device for determining a transmission block size. The device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the sixth aspect to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit is used for M = K. When the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, the TBS is determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding mode.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,用于根据处理单元确定的TBS重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。Optionally, the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface configured to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS determined by the processing unit.
结合第五方面至第八方面中任一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,K中第一次传输时机为t,第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。With reference to any one of the fifth aspect to the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first transmission timing in K is t, and the first transmission timing is the first time that the corresponding transmission is carried in the first time unit. The timing of data on a symbol, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中网络设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, and the network device has a function of realizing the behavior of the network device in the foregoing method. The functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,网络设备的结构中包括处理器和收发器,所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。所述收发器用于支持网络设备与终端设备之间的通信,向终端设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者指令,或接收终端设备发送的上述方法中所涉及的信息或者指令。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,其保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。In a possible design, the structure of the network device includes a processor and a transceiver, and the processor is configured to support the network device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing method. The transceiver is configured to support communication between a network device and a terminal device, and send the information or instructions involved in the above method to the terminal device, or receive the information or instructions involved in the above method sent by the terminal device. The network device may further include a memory, which is configured to be coupled to the processor, and stores program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端设备,该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中终端设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。所述模块可以是软件和/或硬件。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, and the terminal device has a function of implementing the behavior of the terminal device in the foregoing method design. The functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The modules may be software and / or hardware.
在一个可能的设计中,终端设备的结构中包括收发器和处理器,所述收发器被配置为支持终端设备发送或接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。所述处理器用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,以及根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。In a possible design, the structure of the terminal device includes a transceiver and a processor, and the transceiver is configured to support the terminal device to send or receive data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times. The processor is configured to determine the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding mode included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS.
第十一方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括:计算机软件指令;当计算机软件指令在确定传输块大小的装置中运行时,使得确定传输块大小的装置执行上述第一方面至第二方面所述的方法或第五方面至第六方面所述的方法。According to an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, including: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are run in a device for determining a transmission block size, causing the device for determining a transmission block size to execute the foregoing The method according to the first aspect to the second aspect or the method according to the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在确定传输块大小的装置中运行时,使得确定传输块大小的装置执行上述第一方面至第二方面所述的方法或第五方面至第六方面所述的方法。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product including instructions. When the computer program product runs in a device for determining a transmission block size, the device for determining a transmission block size is caused to execute the first aspect to the first aspect. The method according to the second aspect or the methods according to the fifth to sixth aspects.
第十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可 以包括存储器,用于实现上述方法中网络设备或终端设备的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing functions of a network device or a terminal device in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第十四方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括第三方面描述的终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第一方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,以及第四方面描述的网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第二方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置;In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device described in the third aspect or a device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the first aspect to determine a transmission block size, and The network device described in the fourth aspect or an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that supports the network device to implement the method described in the second aspect;
或所述通信系统包括第七方面描述的终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,以及第八方面描述的网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置;Or the communication system includes the terminal device described in the seventh aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifth aspect to determine a transmission block size, and the network device described in the eighth aspect or a support network device to implement the sixth aspect Means for determining the transmission block size of the described method;
或所述通信系统包括第九方面描述的终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第一方面或第五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,以及第十方面描述的网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第二方面或第六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置。Or the communication system includes the terminal device described in the ninth aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to determine the transmission block size for implementing the method described in the first aspect or the fifth aspect, and the network device described in the tenth aspect or an implementation that supports the network device. An apparatus for determining a transmission block size of the method described in the second aspect or the sixth aspect.
另外,上述任意方面的设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面和第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, for the technical effects brought by the design methods in any of the foregoing aspects, refer to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the first aspect and the second aspect, and details are not described herein again.
本申请实施例中,终端设备、网络设备和确定传输块大小的装置的名字对设备本身不构成限定,在实际实现中,这些设备可以以其他名称出现。只要各个设备的功能和本申请实施例类似,属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内。In the embodiments of the present application, the names of the terminal device, network device, and device for determining the size of the transmission block do not limit the device itself. In actual implementation, these devices may appear under other names. As long as the functions of each device are similar to the embodiments of the present application, they belong to the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies.
第十五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:接收到S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据后,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,根据第一TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。其中,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)指示重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。In a fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method, for example, The apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method, such as the apparatus for determining a transmission block size. The chip system is included, and the method includes: after receiving data carried on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit S times, determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units , Decoding the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS. Among them, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents pre-configuration or downlink control information (DCI) indicating that the bearer is repeatedly sent at the first time The number of times of data on the symbol corresponding to the unit; M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于非时隙重复的整体或部分计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送S次。从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
第十六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输块大小的方法,该方法可应用于终端设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持终端设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,或者,该方法可应用于网络设备,或者该方法可应用于可以支持网络设备实现该方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,方法包括:先根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,然后,根据第一TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K 的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者DCI指示重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。In a sixteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission block size. The method can be applied to a terminal device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a terminal device to implement the method, such as The apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. Alternatively, the method can be applied to a network device, or the method can be applied to an apparatus for determining a transmission block size that can support a network device to implement the method, such as the apparatus for determining a transmission block size. The chip system is included, and the method includes: firstly determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and then repeatedly sending the S bearer at the first time according to the first TBS Data on the symbol corresponding to the unit, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents pre-configuration or DCI indicates that the bearer corresponding to the first time unit is repeatedly sent The number of times on the symbol; S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,基于非时隙重复的整体或部分计算TBS,用一个第一时间单元发送一次该TBS对应的数据,重复发送S次。从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于非时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。同时,保证传输可靠性的同时,也能保证了重复传输起点的灵活性。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application calculates the TBS based on the whole or part of the non-timeslot repetition, sends the data corresponding to the TBS once in a first time unit, and repeatedly sends S times. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on non-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS. At the same time, while ensuring the reliability of transmission, the flexibility of repeated transmission starting points can also be guaranteed.
结合第十五方面或第十六方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,在根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS之前,方法还包括:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,若参考码率大于码率门限,根据码率门限确定M,M<K,且根据M确定的第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。其中,参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第一码率由网络设备指示的码率,第一调制阶数由网络设备指示的调制阶数。M为满足参考码率不大于码率门限的最大正整数,所谓“参考码率”可以是指将第一TBS对应的TB承载于一个第一时间单元所占用的时频资源上传输时的码率。在下文中,应理解,M确定的第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率可以是指将第一TBS对应的TB承载于一个第一时间单元所占用的时频资源上传输时的码率。将第一TBS对应的TB承载于一个第一时间单元所占用的时频资源上传输时的码率也可以理解为将第一TBS对应的TB承载于一个第一时间单元所占用的时频资源上传输时的比特数。With reference to the fifteenth aspect or the sixteenth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, before determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, The method further includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units; if the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, determining M according to the code rate threshold , M <K, and the first TBS determined according to M acts on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit that is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. The reference code rate is a code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS, the first code rate is a code rate indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is a modulation order indicated by the network device. M is the largest positive integer that satisfies the reference code rate not greater than the code rate threshold. The so-called "reference code rate" may refer to the code when transmitting the TB corresponding to the first TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit. rate. In the following, it should be understood that the bit rate corresponding to a first time unit determined by the first TBS determined by M may refer to the time when the TB corresponding to the first TBS is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by the first time unit. Bit rate. The bit rate when transmitting the TB corresponding to the first TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit can also be understood as the TB corresponding to the first TBS is carried on the time-frequency resource occupied by a first time unit The number of bits during transmission.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过调整计算TBS所使用的迷你时隙的个数,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet. The decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
结合第十五方面或第十六方面,在第二种可能的实现方式中,M=K,在根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,包括:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,若参考码率大于码率门限,根据比例因子确定第一TBS,第一TBS小于第二TBS,比例因子大于0且小于1,且根据第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。其中,参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第一码率由网络设备指示,第一调制阶数由网络设备指示。With reference to the fifteenth aspect or the sixteenth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, M = K, and determine the first number according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units. A TBS includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units; if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining a For one TBS, the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the bit rate corresponding to a first time unit according to the first TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold. The reference code rate is a code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS. The first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过利用比例因子确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
结合第十五方面或第十六方面,在第二种可能的实现方式中,M=K,在根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS之前,方法还包括:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第二码率由网络设备指示,第二调制阶数由网络设备指示;根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素 RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,包括:若参考码率大于码率门限,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,用于确定第一TBS的第一码率为码率门限,且根据第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。With reference to the fifteenth aspect or the sixteenth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, M = K, and determine the first number according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units. Before a TBS, the method further includes: determining a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the K first time units, the reference code rate acting on a first TBS The code rate corresponding to a time unit, the second code rate is indicated by the network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device; according to the resource element RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units Determining the first TBS includes: if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, for determining the first TBS; The first code rate is a code rate threshold, and according to the first TBS, the code rate corresponding to a first time unit is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,可以通过预配置的码率确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. The end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
第十七方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第十五方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第十五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第十五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,且根据第一TBS解码接收单元接收到的上述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。In a seventeenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the above fifteenth aspect. The device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device that implements the method described in the fifteenth aspect. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or, determines a transmission block size. The device is a network device or a device that supports a network device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device to determine a transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and decodes the first TBS corresponding to the first time unit received by the first TBS decoding receiving unit. Data on the symbol, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者DCI指示重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数。Optionally, the apparatus for determining the size of the transmission block may further include a communication interface for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, where S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, and K is greater than Or an integer equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
第十八方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种确定传输块大小的装置,用于实现上述第十六方面描述的方法。确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第十方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统,和/或者,确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第十六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置包括芯片系统。例如,该确定传输块大小的装置包括:处理单元。所述处理单元,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者DCI指示重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数。In an eighteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device for determining a transmission block size, which is used to implement the method described in the sixteenth aspect. The device for determining the transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting the terminal device that implements the method described in the tenth aspect. For example, the device for determining the transmission block size includes a chip system, and / or The device is a network device or a device that supports a network device and implements the method described in the sixteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size includes a chip system. For example, the apparatus for determining a transmission block size includes a processing unit. The processing unit determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, and K is greater than Or an integer equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit.
可选地,确定传输块大小的装置还可以包括通信接口,用于根据处理单元确定的第一TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。Optionally, the apparatus for determining the transmission block size may further include a communication interface for repeatedly sending data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS determined by the processing unit, where S is an integer and S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
结合第十七方面或第十八方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,若参考码率大于码率门限,根据码率门限确定M。其中,M<K,且根据M确定的第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第一码率由网络设备指示,第一调制阶数由网络设备指示。With reference to the seventeenth aspect or the eighteenth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units Determine the second TBS and the reference code rate. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, determine M according to the code rate threshold. Wherein, M <K, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the first TBS determined according to M is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. The reference code rate acts on the code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS. The first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过调整计算 TBS所使用的迷你时隙的个数,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet. The decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
结合第十七方面或第十八方面,在第二种可能的实现方式中,M=K,处理单元,用于:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,若参考码率大于码率门限,根据比例因子确定第一TBS。其中,第一TBS小于第二TBS,比例因子大于0且小于1,且根据第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第一码率由网络设备指示,第一调制阶数由网络设备指示。With reference to the seventeenth aspect or the eighteenth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, M = K, and the processing unit is configured to: according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first bit rate, and the first The modulation order determines the second TBS and the reference code rate. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the first TBS is determined according to a scale factor. The first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the first TBS is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. The reference code rate acts on the code rate corresponding to a first time unit for the second TBS. The first code rate is indicated by the network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过利用比例因子确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
结合第十七方面或第十八方面,在第三种可能的实现方式中,M=K,处理单元,还用于:根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率,第二码率由网络设备指示,第二调制阶数由网络设备指示;处理单元,用于:若参考码率大于码率门限,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,用于确定第一TBS的第一码率为码率门限,且根据第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。With reference to the seventeenth aspect or the eighteenth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner, M = K, the processing unit is further configured to: according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the second bit rate, and the first The second modulation order determines the second TBS and the reference code rate. The reference code rate acts on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit. The second code rate is indicated by the network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device. A processing unit, configured to: if the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determine the first TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and determine the first TBS The first code rate is a code rate threshold, and according to the first TBS, the code rate corresponding to a first time unit is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,可以通过预配置的码率确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. The end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
结合上述任意方面,在第四种可能的实现方式中,M为预配置、预定义或DCI指示的,且根据M确定的第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。In combination with any of the above aspects, in a fourth possible implementation manner, M is pre-configured, predefined, or indicated by DCI, and the first TBS determined according to M has a bit rate corresponding to a first time unit that is less than or equal to the code Rate threshold.
结合上述各种可能的实现方式,在第五种可能的实现方式中,第一时间单元的时长为K个第一时间单元的时长中最大值或最小值。With reference to the foregoing various possible implementation manners, in a fifth possible implementation manner, the duration of the first time unit is a maximum value or a minimum value of the durations of the K first time units.
第十九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中网络设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a nineteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, and the network device has a function of realizing the behavior of the network device in the foregoing method. The functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,网络设备的结构中包括处理器和收发器,所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。所述收发器用于支持网络设备与终端设备之间的通信,向终端设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者指令,或接收终端设备发送的上述方法中所涉及的信息或者指令。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,其保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。In a possible design, the structure of the network device includes a processor and a transceiver, and the processor is configured to support the network device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing method. The transceiver is configured to support communication between a network device and a terminal device, and send the information or instructions involved in the above method to the terminal device, or receive the information or instructions involved in the above method sent by the terminal device. The network device may further include a memory, which is configured to be coupled to the processor, and stores program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
第二十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端设备,该终端设备具有实现上述方法设计中终端设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。所述模块可以是软件和/或硬件。In a twentieth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, and the terminal device has a function of realizing the behavior of the terminal device in the foregoing method design. The functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The modules may be software and / or hardware.
在一个可能的设计中,终端设备的结构中包括收发器和处理器,所述收发器被配置为支持终端设备发送或接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。所述处理器用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,以及根据第一TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。In a possible design, the structure of the terminal device includes a transceiver and a processor, and the transceiver is configured to support the terminal device to send or receive data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times. The processor is configured to determine the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, and decode the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS.
第二十一方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括:计算机软件指令;当计算机软件指令在确定传输块大小的装置中运行时,使得确定传输块大小的装置执行上述第十五方面至第十六方面所述的方法。In a twenty-first aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, including: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are run in a device for determining a transmission block size, causing the device for determining a transmission block size to execute The method described in the above fifteenth to sixteenth aspects.
第二十二方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在确定传输块大小的装置中运行时,使得确定传输块大小的装置执行上述第十五方面至第十六方面所述的方法。In a twenty-second aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product including instructions. When the computer program product runs in a device for determining a transmission block size, the device for determining a transmission block size is caused to execute the above-mentioned fifteenth aspect. To the method described in the sixteenth aspect.
第二十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现上述方法中网络设备或终端设备的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing functions of a network device or a terminal device in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第二十四方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括第十七方面描述的终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第十五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,以及第十八方面描述的网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第十六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置;In a twenty-fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device described in the seventeenth aspect or a terminal device that supports the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size. An apparatus, and the network device described in the eighteenth aspect or a device for determining a transmission block size that supports the network device to implement the method described in the sixteenth aspect;
或者,所述通信系统包括第十九方面描述的终端设备或支持终端设备实现该第十五方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,以及第二十方面描述的网络设备或支持网络设备实现该第十六方面描述的方法的确定传输块大小的装置。Alternatively, the communication system includes the terminal device described in the nineteenth aspect or a device for supporting the terminal device to implement the method described in the fifteenth aspect to determine a transmission block size, and the network device described in the twentieth aspect or an implementation that supports the network device. Means for determining the transport block size of the method described in the sixteenth aspect.
另外,上述任意方面的设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第十五方面和第十六方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, for the technical effects brought by the design manners in any of the foregoing aspects, refer to the technical effects brought by the different design manners in the fifteenth aspect and the sixteenth aspect, and details are not described herein again.
本申请实施例中,终端设备、网络设备和确定传输块大小的装置的名字对设备本身不构成限定,在实际实现中,这些设备可以以其他名称出现。只要各个设备的功能和本申请实施例类似,属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内。In the embodiments of the present application, the names of the terminal device, network device, and device for determining the size of the transmission block do not limit the device itself. In actual implementation, these devices may appear under other names. As long as the functions of each device are similar to the embodiments of the present application, they belong to the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1为现有技术提供的一种基于时隙重复的传输块示例图;FIG. 1 is an example diagram of a transmission block based on time slot repetition provided in the prior art; FIG.
图2为现有技术提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输块示例图;FIG. 2 is an exemplary diagram of a transmission block based on mini-slot repetition provided in the prior art; FIG.
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种移动通信系统的架构示例图;FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example architecture of a mobile communication system according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统示例图;FIG. 4 is an exemplary diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图一;5 is a first flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输数据的示例图一;FIG. 6 is a first exemplary diagram of data transmission based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输数据的示例图二;7 is a second example of transmission data based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输数据的示例图三;FIG. 8 is a third example of transmission data based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为现有技术提供的一种DMRS传输的示例图;FIG. 9 is an example diagram of a DMRS transmission provided in the prior art; FIG.
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图二;10 is a second flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输数据的示例图四;FIG. 11 is a fourth example of transmission data based on mini-slot repetition according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输数据的示例图五;FIG. 12 is an example of a repeated transmission data based on mini-slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的装置的组成示例图一;13 is a first structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的装置的组成示例图二;14 is a second structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的组成示例图;FIG. 15 is a composition example diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的组成示例图;FIG. 16 is a composition example diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图三;17 is a third flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图四;18 is a fourth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图五;19 is a fifth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的装置的组成示例图三;20 is a third structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的装置的组成示例图四;21 is a fourth structural example of a device for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的组成示例图;FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a composition example of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的组成示例图。FIG. 23 is a composition example diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”和“第三”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于限定特定顺序。The terms "first", "second", "third" and the like in the specification and claims of the present application and the above-mentioned drawings are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to define a specific order.
在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。In the embodiments of the present application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used as examples, illustrations or illustrations. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of the words "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present the relevant concept in a concrete manner.
移动通信技术已经深刻地改变了人们的生活,但人们对更高性能的移动通信技术的追求从未停止。为了应对未来爆炸性的移动数据流量增长、海量移动通信的设备连接、不断涌现的各类新业务和应用场景,第五代(the fifth generation,5G)移动通信系统应运而生。国际电信联盟(international telecommunication union,ITU)为5G以及未来的移动通信系统定义了三大类应用场景:增强型移动宽带(enhanced mobile broadband,eMBB)、高可靠低时延通信(ultra reliable and low latency communications,URLLC)以及海量机器类通信(massive machine type communications,mMTC)。Mobile communication technology has profoundly changed people's lives, but people's pursuit of higher performance mobile communication technology has never stopped. In order to cope with the explosive growth of mobile data traffic in the future, the connection of massive mobile communication equipment, and the emergence of various new services and application scenarios, the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system has emerged at the historic moment. The International Telecommunication Union (ITU) defines three major application scenarios for 5G and future mobile communication systems: enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra-reliable, and low-latency communication. communications (URLLC) and mass machine type communications (mMTC).
典型的eMBB业务有:超高清视频、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)等,这些业务的主要特点是传输数据量大、传输速率很高。Typical eMBB services are: ultra-high-definition video, augmented reality (AR), virtual reality (VR), etc. The main characteristics of these services are large amount of data transmitted and high transmission rate.
典型的mMTC业务有:智能电网配电自动化、智慧城市等,主要特点是联网设备数量巨大、传输数据量较小、数据对传输时延不敏感,这些mMTC终端需要满足低成本和非常长的待机时间的需求。Typical mMTC services are: smart grid power distribution automation, smart cities, etc. The main characteristics are the huge number of connected devices, the small amount of data transmitted, and the data not sensitive to transmission delay. These mMTC terminals need to meet low cost and very long standby The need for time.
典型的URLLC业务有:工业制造或生产流程中的无线控制、无人驾驶汽车和无人驾驶飞机的运动控制以及远程修理、远程手术等触觉交互类应用,这些业务的主要特点是要求超高可靠性、低延时,传输数据量较少以及具有突发性。例如,车对外界的信息交换(vehicle to everything,V2X)需要的可靠性为99.999%,端到端时延为5毫秒(millisecond,ms);配电(power distribution)需要可靠性为99.9999%,端到端时延为5ms;工厂自动化(Factory automation)可靠性为99.9999%,端到端时延为2ms。Typical URLLC services are: wireless control in industrial manufacturing or production processes, motion control of driverless cars and drones, and haptic interaction applications such as remote repair and remote surgery. The main characteristics of these services are ultra-high reliability. It has low latency, low transmission data volume and burstiness. For example, vehicle-to-external information exchange (V2X) requires a reliability of 99.999% and end-to-end delay of 5 milliseconds (millisecond, ms); power distribution needs a reliability of 99.9999%. The end-to-end delay is 5ms; the reliability of Factory Automation is 99.9999%, and the end-to-end delay is 2ms.
在现有技术中,终端设备与网络设备传输数据的过程中,对于终端设备要发送的数据量和网络设备要接收的数据量二者需要对齐理解,这个数据量可以用传输块大小(transport block size,TBS)表示。可以理解的,传输块大小即一定的时频资源上承 载的数据量(比特数)。传输块(transport block,TB)指承载在时频资源上传输一次的数据。另外,承载在时频资源上每次传输的数据可以称为一个副本(repetition)。下面对现有技术提供的确定TBS的方法流程进行简单介绍。In the prior art, in the process of transmitting data between a terminal device and a network device, the amount of data to be sent by the terminal device and the amount of data to be received by the network device need to be aligned and understood. This data amount can be determined by using the transport block size size, TBS). It can be understood that the transmission block size is the amount of data (bit number) carried on a certain time-frequency resource. A transport block (transport block, TB) refers to data carried once and transmitted on time-frequency resources. In addition, data transmitted on each time-frequency resource may be referred to as a repetition. The method flow for determining the TBS provided in the prior art is briefly introduced below.
第一,确定一个时隙(slot)中的资源元素(resource element,RE)数。具体的,利用公式一
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000001
确定一个时隙中的RE数。其中,N RE′表示一个时隙中的RE数;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000002
表示一个物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)中频域上的载波数,例如,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000003
表示一个时隙内物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)调度的符号数,PUSCH用于传输上行数据,PDSCH用于传输下行数据,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000004
表示一个PRB中解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)所占的RE数,包括DMRS开销,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000005
表示是由高层参数PUSCH-业务小区配置(PUSCH-servingcellconfig)中的开销(xOverhead)参数配置的开销。
First, determine the number of resource elements (REs) in a slot. Specifically, using formula one
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000001
Determine the number of REs in a time slot. Where N RE ′ represents the number of REs in a time slot;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000002
Represents the number of carriers in the frequency domain in a physical resource block (PRB). For example,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000003
Represents the number of symbols scheduled by a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) within a time slot. PUSCH is used to transmit uplink data and PDSCH is used to transmit downlink data.
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000004
Indicates the number of REs occupied by a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) in a PRB, including the DMRS overhead,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000005
Represents the overhead configured by the overhead (xOverhead) parameter in the high-layer parameter PUSCH-serving cell config.
第二,根据一个时隙中的RE数确定计算TBS的RE数。具体的,通过公式二N RE=min(156,N RE′)·n PRB获取用于计算TBS的RE数,其中,N RE表示用于计算TBS的RE数;n PRB表示PRB的个数。 Second, the number of REs for calculating the TBS is determined according to the number of REs in a slot. Specifically, N RE = min (156, N RE ′) · n PRB is used to obtain the number of REs used to calculate TBS, where N RE is the number of REs used to calculate TBS; n PRB is the number of PRBs.
第三,根据用于计算TBS的RE数确定TBS。具体的,通过公式三N info=N RE·R·Q m·υ得到信息比特数。其中,Q m为调制阶数,R为码率,Q m和R是通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS)域所指示的值在协议中查表得到。υ表示母码码率。如果N info≤3824,通过公式四
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000006
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000007
在协议中查表得到不小于N′ info最近的一个值作为TBS;如果N info>3824,通过公式五
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000008
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000009
如果码率R≤1/4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000010
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000011
否则,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000012
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000013
C表示编码块的数目。
Third, the TBS is determined based on the number of REs used to calculate the TBS. Specifically, the number of information bits is obtained by formula three N info = N RE · R · Q m · υ. Among them, Q m is a modulation order, R is a code rate, and Q m and R are values indicated by a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) field in downlink control information (DCI). Get the table in the agreement. υ represents the mother code rate. If N info ≤3824, by formula four
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000006
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000007
Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; if N info > 3824, use formula 5
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000008
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000009
If the bit rate R≤1 / 4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000010
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000011
otherwise,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000012
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000013
C represents the number of coding blocks.
综上所述,TBS是由PDSCH或PUSCH调度的时频资源,以及MCS包括的码率和调制阶数确定的。其中,计算所需的PDSCH/PUSCH调度的时频资源在时域上是指一个时隙内的符号。上述协议可以是NR R15,确定TBS的方法的详细解释可以参考NR R15协议38.214中的阐述。根据NR R15的规定,一个时隙包括14个符号。现有技术中,计算TBS所使用的符合数的最大值可以为14。In summary, TBS is determined by the time-frequency resources scheduled by PDSCH or PUSCH, and the code rate and modulation order included in MCS. Among them, the time-frequency resources of the PDSCH / PUSCH scheduling required for calculation refer to symbols in one time slot in the time domain. The above protocol may be NR R15. For a detailed explanation of the method of determining TBS, please refer to the explanation in NR R15 protocol 38.214. According to the regulations of NR R15, one slot includes 14 symbols. In the prior art, the maximum number of coincidence numbers used to calculate TBS may be 14.
另外,为了提高数据传输的可靠性,NR R15这个版本的协议中支持基于时隙(slot-based)重复(repetition)传输数据。具体来说,网络设备预先配置预设重复次数K,终端设备在连续的K个时隙中的每个时隙分配的相同符号上传输相同的传输块。可理解的,在K个时隙中每个时隙分配的相同符号上传输的传输块的大小相同且内容 相同。示例的,图1为现有技术提供的一种基于时隙重复的传输块示例图。如图1所示,时隙n和时隙n+1是两个连续的任意时隙,时隙n包括14个符号,时隙n+1包括14个符号。假设K=2,时隙n包括的符号4至符号11用于第一次传输TB对应的数据,时隙n+1包括的符号4至符号11用于第二次传输TB对应的数据。每个时隙包括的符号4至符号11传输的数据可以认为是一个传输块,时隙n包括的符号4至符号11传输的数据内容与时隙n+1包括的符号4至符号11传输的数据内容相同。在确定基于时隙重复的TBS时,为了不超过计算TBS的上限,即一个时隙,可以根据上述确定TBS的方法计算K次重复中的一次,即一个时隙内的TBS。In addition, in order to improve the reliability of data transmission, the NR R15 protocol supports slot-based repetition transmission of data. Specifically, the network device is configured with a preset number of repetitions K in advance, and the terminal device transmits the same transport block on the same symbol allocated in each of the K consecutive time slots. Understandably, the transport blocks transmitted on the same symbol allocated in each time slot in the K time slots have the same size and the same content. For example, FIG. 1 is an example diagram of a transmission block based on time slot repetition provided in the prior art. As shown in FIG. 1, time slot n and time slot n + 1 are two consecutive arbitrary time slots, time slot n includes 14 symbols, and time slot n + 1 includes 14 symbols. Assuming K = 2, symbols 4 to 11 included in slot n are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the first time, and symbols 4 to 11 included in slot n + 1 are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the second time. The data transmitted from symbols 4 to 11 included in each time slot can be considered as a transmission block. The data content of symbols 4 to 11 included in time slot n and the data transmitted from symbols 4 to 11 included in time slot n + 1 The data content is the same. When determining the TBS based on time slot repetitions, in order not to exceed the upper limit of calculating the TBS, that is, one time slot, one of the K repetitions, that is, the TBS in one time slot, may be calculated according to the above method for determining the TBS.
在长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中,最小的时间调度单元为一个1ms时间长度的传输时间间隔(transmission time interval,TTI)。5G既支持时间单元级别的时域调度粒度,也可以支持微时间单元的时域调度粒度,以及满足不同业务的时延需求。例如,时间单元主要用于eMBB业务,微时间单元主要用于URLLC业务。需要说明的是,上述时间单元和微时间单元是一般性的说法,具体的一个例子可以为,时间单元可以称为时隙,微时间单元可以称为微时隙、非时隙(non-slot-based)或迷你时隙(mini-slot);或者,时间单元可以称为子帧,微时间单元可以称为微子帧;其他类似的时域资源划分方式都不做限定。本申请以下均以时隙和迷你时隙来举例说明,其中,一个时隙比如可以包括14个时域符号,一个迷你时隙包括的时域符号数小于14,比如2、3、4、5、6或7等等;或者,一个时隙比如可以包括7个时域符号,一个迷你时隙包括的时域符号数小于7,比如2或4等等,具体取值也不做限定。这里的时域符号可以是正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号。对于子载波间隔为15千赫兹(kilohertz,kHz)的一个时隙,包括6个或7个时域符号,对应的时间长度为0.5ms;对于子载波间隔为60kHz的一个时隙,对应的时间长度则缩短为0.125ms。In a long term evolution (LTE) system, the smallest time scheduling unit is a transmission time interval (TTI) with a duration of 1 ms. 5G supports both the granularity of time-domain scheduling at the time unit level and the granularity of time-domain scheduling at the micro-time unit, as well as meeting the delay requirements of different services. For example, the time unit is mainly used for eMBB services, and the micro time unit is mainly used for URLLC services. It should be noted that the above time unit and micro time unit are general terms, and a specific example may be that a time unit may be called a time slot, and a micro time unit may be called a micro time slot or a non-slot -based) or mini-slot; or, the time unit may be referred to as a sub-frame, and the micro-time unit may be referred to as a micro-subframe; other similar time-domain resource division methods are not limited. In the following descriptions of the present application, time slots and mini time slots are used as examples. A time slot may include, for example, 14 time domain symbols. A mini time slot includes less than 14 time domain symbols, such as 2, 3, 4, and 5. , 6 or 7, etc .; or, a time slot may include, for example, 7 time domain symbols, and a mini time slot includes less than 7 time domain symbols, such as 2 or 4, and the specific value is not limited. The time domain symbols here may be orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. For a time slot with a subcarrier interval of 15 kilohertz (kilohertz, kHz), including 6 or 7 time domain symbols, the corresponding time length is 0.5ms; for a time slot with a subcarrier interval of 60kHz, the corresponding time The length is shortened to 0.125ms.
由于URLLC对于时延要求很高,现有技术中可以采用基于迷你时隙的时域调度粒度,以数据量较小的小包发送数据,以满足URLLC低时延的特征。通常可以将32字节(byte,即256bits)定义为一个小包。同理,为了提高数据传输的可靠性,可以基于迷你时隙(mini-slot based)重复传输数据。示例的,图2为现有技术提供的一种基于迷你时隙重复的传输块示例图。如图2所示,假设时隙n包括14个符号,迷你时隙包括4个符号,K=2,时隙n包括的符号4至符号7为第一个迷你时隙,用于第一次传输TB对应的数据,时隙n包括的符号8至符号11为第二个迷你时隙,用于第二次传输TB对应的数据。每4个符号传输的数据可以认为是一个传输块。Because URLLC has high requirements for delay, in the prior art, the mini-slot-based time-domain scheduling granularity can be used to send data in small packets with a small amount of data to meet URLLC's low-latency characteristics. Generally, 32 bytes (bytes, that is, 256 bits) can be defined as a small packet. Similarly, in order to improve the reliability of data transmission, data can be repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slot based. By way of example, FIG. 2 is an exemplary diagram of a mini-slot repeat based transmission block provided in the prior art. As shown in FIG. 2, it is assumed that the time slot n includes 14 symbols, the mini time slot includes 4 symbols, K = 2, and the symbols 4 to 7 included in the time slot n are the first mini time slots for the first time. Data corresponding to TB is transmitted. Symbols 8 to 11 included in slot n are the second mini-slots, which are used to transmit data corresponding to TB for the second time. The data transmitted every 4 symbols can be considered as a transport block.
在这种基于迷你时隙重复传输数据的情况下,因为迷你时隙重复所需的时域资源可能并不会超过一个时隙,即达不到现有技术计算TBS规定的时域符号上限。例如,若一个迷你时隙为2符号,配置重复次数为4次,总计需要8个符号完成传输,不足一个时隙(14个符号)。所以,基于迷你时隙重复传输数据时,不必完全根据上述基于时隙重复的TBS的计算方法计算获取基于迷你时隙重复的TBS。因此,本申请所要解决的技术问题为如何确定基于迷你时隙重复的TBS。In the case of repeatedly transmitting data based on mini-slots, the time-domain resources required for mini-slots repetition may not exceed one time slot, that is, the upper limit of the time-domain symbols prescribed by the prior art calculation TBS cannot be reached. For example, if a mini-slot is 2 symbols and the number of configuration repetitions is 4 times, a total of 8 symbols are required to complete the transmission, which is less than one slot (14 symbols). Therefore, when repeatedly transmitting data based on the mini-slot, it is not necessary to calculate and obtain the TBS based on the mini-slot repetition completely according to the calculation method of the TBS based on the timeslot repetition. Therefore, the technical problem to be solved in this application is how to determine a TBS based on mini-slot repetition.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供一种确定TBS的方法,其基本原理是:发送设备根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,根据TBS重复 发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。然后,接收设备接收到S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据后,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,并根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据。其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于迷你时隙重复的预设重复次数中的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。In order to solve the above problem, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a TBS. The basic principle is that the sending device determines the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units. Data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit. Then, after receiving the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, the receiving device determines the TBS according to the RE number and modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, and decodes the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS. Data. Among them, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of times that the pre-configured data is repeatedly transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, and S is an integer. S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions of the preset number of repetitions based on mini-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used to calculate the TBS.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例所述的第一时间单元可以是上述的微时间单元、微时隙、非时隙或迷你时隙,第二时间单元可以是上述的时间单元。另外,对于上行传输,发送设备可以是终端设备,接收设备可以是基站,重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为上行数据;对于下行传输,发送设备可以是基站,接收设备可以是终端设备,重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为下行数据。It should be noted that the first time unit described in the embodiment of the present application may be the above-mentioned micro time unit, micro time slot, non-time slot, or mini time slot, and the second time unit may be the above time unit. In addition, for uplink transmission, the sending device may be a terminal device, and the receiving device may be a base station, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly sent S times is uplink data; for downlink transmission, the sending device may be a base station and receive The device may be a terminal device, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly for S times is downlink data.
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。The embodiments of the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.
图3示出的是可以应用于本申请实施例的移动通信系统的架构示例图。如图3所示,该移动通信系统包括核心网设备301、网络设备302和至少一个终端设备(如图3中所示的终端设备303和终端设备304)。终端设备通过无线的方式与网络设备相连,网络设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网设备连接。核心网设备与网络设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是将核心网设备的功能与网络设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上,还可以是一个物理设备上集成了部分核心网设备的功能和部分的网络设备的功能。终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。图3只是示意图,该移动通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备,在图3中未画出。本申请的实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的核心网设备、网络设备和终端设备的数量不做限定。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary architecture of a mobile communication system that can be applied to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the mobile communication system includes a core network device 301, a network device 302, and at least one terminal device (such as a terminal device 303 and a terminal device 304 shown in FIG. 3). The terminal device is connected to the network device in a wireless manner, and the network device is connected to the core network device in a wireless or wired manner. The core network device and the network device may be separate physical devices, or the functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the network device may be integrated on the same physical device, or a physical device may be integrated with part of the core network. The functions of the device and the functions of some network devices. The terminal equipment can be fixed or removable. FIG. 3 is only a schematic diagram. The mobile communication system may further include other network devices, such as a wireless relay device and a wireless backhaul device, which are not shown in FIG. 3. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of core network devices, network devices, and terminal devices included in the mobile communication system.
其中,终端设备可以是能够接收网络设备调度和指示信息的无线终端设备,无线终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,或具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。无线终端设备可以经无线接入网(如,radio access network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网或者互联网进行通信,无线终端设备可以是移动终端设备,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话,手机(mobile phone))、计算机和数据卡,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为系统、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户站(subscriber station,SS)、用户端设备 (customer premises equipment,CPE)、终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等。对于URLLC应用场景,终端设备可以为工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。The terminal device may be a wireless terminal device capable of receiving network device scheduling and instruction information. The wireless terminal device may be a device that provides voice and / or data connectivity to the user, or a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or connected to Wireless modem other processing equipment. A wireless terminal device can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via a wireless access network (eg, radio access network, RAN). The wireless terminal device can be a mobile terminal device, such as a mobile phone (or a "cellular" phone) , Mobile phone (phone), computer and data card, for example, can be portable, compact, handheld, computer built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, they exchange languages and / or data with the wireless access network. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and tablets Computers (Pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions, etc. A wireless terminal device may also be called a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a mobile station (MS), a remote station, and an access point ( access point (AP), remote terminal device (remote terminal), access terminal device (access terminal), user terminal device (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user station (subscriber station (SS), user terminal device (customer premises equipment (CPE)), terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), and so on. For the URLLC application scenario, the terminal device can be a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical surgery, or a smart grid. The wireless terminal in the wireless terminal, the wireless terminal in the transportation safety, the wireless terminal in the smart city, the wireless terminal in the smart home, and so on.
网络设备可以是无线通信的基站(base station,BS)、基站控制器或演进型基站(eNodeB)等。也可以称为无线接入点,收发站,中继站,小区,发送接收点(transmit and receive port,TRP)等等。具体的,网络设备是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置,其主要功能包括如下一个或多个功能:进行无线资源的管理、互联网协议(internet protocol,IP)头的压缩及用户数据流的加密、用户设备附着时进行移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)的选择、路由用户面数据至服务网关(service gateway,SGW)、寻呼消息的组织和发送、广播消息的组织和发送、以移动性或调度为目的的测量及测量报告的配置等等。网络设备可以包括各种形式的蜂窝基站、家庭基站、小区、无线传输点、宏基站、微基站、中继站、无线接入点等等。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中,具备网络设备功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同。例如,在5G NR系统中,称为5G基站(generation Node B,gNB)等等。随着通信技术的演进,网络设备的名称可能会变化。此外,在其它可能的情况下,网络设备可以是其它为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为方便描述,本申请实施例中,为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置称为网络设备。The network device may be a base station (BS), a base station controller, or an evolved base station (eNodeB), etc. for wireless communication. It can also be called a wireless access point, a transceiver station, a relay station, a cell, a transmit and receive point (TRP), and so on. Specifically, a network device is a device that is deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices. Its main functions include one or more of the following functions: management of wireless resources, Internet protocol (IP, Internet protocol) ) Header compression and user data stream encryption, mobility management entity (MME) selection when user equipment is attached, routing user plane data to service gateway (SGW), organization and sending of paging messages , Organization and transmission of broadcast messages, measurement and configuration of measurement reports for mobility or scheduling purposes, and so on. The network equipment may include various forms of cellular base stations, home base stations, cells, wireless transmission points, macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, wireless access points, and so on. In systems using different wireless access technologies, the names of devices with network device capabilities may vary. For example, in a 5G NR system, it is called a 5G base station (generation NodeB, gNB), and so on. As communication technology evolves, the names of network devices may change. In addition, in other possible cases, the network device may be another device that provides a wireless communication function for the terminal device. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device. For ease of description, in the embodiments of the present application, a device that provides a wireless communication function for a terminal device is referred to as a network device.
本申请主要应用于5G NR系统。本申请也可以应用于其它的通信系统,只要该通信系统中存在实体需要发送传输方向指示信息,另一个实体需要接收该指示信息,并根据该指示信息确定一定时间内的传输方向。示例的,图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统示例图。如图4所示,基站和终端设备1~终端设备6组成一个通信系统。在该通信系统中,终端设备1~终端设备6可以发送上行数据给基站,基站接收终端设备1~终端设备6发送的上行数据。基站也可以向终端设备1~终端设备6发送下行数据,终端设备1~终端设备6接收下行数据。此外,终端设备4~终端设备6也可以组成一个通信系统。在该通信系统中,终端设备5可以接收终端设备4或终端设备6发送的上行信息,终端设备5向终端设备4或终端设备6发送的下行信息。This application is mainly applied to 5G NR systems. This application can also be applied to other communication systems, as long as an entity in the communication system needs to send transmission direction instruction information, another entity needs to receive the instruction information, and determine a transmission direction within a certain time based on the instruction information. For example, FIG. 4 is an exemplary diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the base station and the terminal devices 1 to 6 constitute a communication system. In this communication system, the terminal devices 1 to 6 can send uplink data to the base station, and the base station receives the uplink data sent by the terminal devices 1 to 6. The base station may also send downlink data to terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6, and terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6 receive the downlink data. In addition, the terminal devices 4 to 6 may also constitute a communication system. In this communication system, the terminal device 5 may receive uplink information sent by the terminal device 4 or the terminal device 6, and the terminal device 5 sends the downlink information to the terminal device 4 or the terminal device 6.
网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和卫星上。本申请的实施例对网络设备和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; it can also be deployed on the water; it can also be deployed on air planes, balloons and satellites. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of the network device and the terminal device.
网络设备和终端设备之间以及终端设备和终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱(licensed spectrum)进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对网络设备和终端设备之间所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Network equipment and terminal equipment and between terminal equipment and terminal equipment can communicate through licensed spectrum (unlicensed spectrum), can also communicate through unlicensed spectrum (unlicensed spectrum), or both through licensed spectrum and unlicensed spectrum Communication. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used between the network device and the terminal device.
本申请的实施例可以适用于下行信号传输,也可以适用于上行信号传输,还可以适用于设备到设备(device to device,D2D)的信号传输。对于D2D的信号传输,发 送设备是终端设备,对应的接收设备也是终端设备。对于上行信号传输,发送设备是终端设备,对应的接收设备是网络设备,根据TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为上行数据。对于下行信号传输,发送设备是网络设备,对应的接收设备是终端设备,TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为下行数据。The embodiments of the present application can be applied to downlink signal transmission, can also be applied to uplink signal transmission, and can also be applied to device-to-device (D2D) signal transmission. For D2D signal transmission, the sending device is a terminal device, and the corresponding receiving device is also a terminal device. For uplink signal transmission, the sending device is a terminal device, and the corresponding receiving device is a network device. The data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly sent S times according to the TBS is uplink data. For downlink signal transmission, the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device. The TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data.
下面以上行信号传输为例对确定传输块大小的方法进行详细说明。图5为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图一。在本申请实施例中,假设第一时间单元为迷你时隙,以及第二时间单元为时隙。基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所需的时域资源在一个时隙内。如图5所示,该方法可以包括:The method of determining the size of a transmission block is described in detail below using the upper line signal transmission as an example. FIG. 5 is a first flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the first time unit is a mini time slot and the second time unit is a time slot. The time domain resources required to repeatedly transmit data based on mini-slots are in one slot. As shown in FIG. 5, the method may include:
S501、终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。S501. The terminal device determines the TBS according to the number of REs included in the M mini-slots and the modulation and coding method.
其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。K表示预配置重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的次数,K为大于或等于2的整数。在实际应用中,可以通过高层参数预先配置预设重复次数K,高层参数可以是repK。或者,预设重复次数K也可以由DCI动态指示。本申请以下均以K表示为预设重复次数为例说明。根据迷你时隙包括的符号个数的不同,预设重复次数K可以取不同的取值。Wherein, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. K represents the number of times that the pre-configured data is repeatedly transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot. K is an integer greater than or equal to 2. In practical applications, the preset number of repetitions K can be configured in advance through high-level parameters, and the high-level parameter can be repK. Alternatively, the preset number of repetitions K may also be dynamically indicated by the DCI. In the following application, K is used as an example to describe the preset number of repetitions. Depending on the number of symbols included in the mini-slot, the preset number of repetitions K can take different values.
示例性的,假设一个时隙包括14个符号。若迷你时隙包括2符号,预设重复次数K可以为2、3、4、5、6或7。相应的,2个迷你时隙包括2符号,3个迷你时隙包括6符号,4个迷你时隙包括8符号,5个迷你时隙包括10符号,6个迷你时隙包括12符号,7个迷你时隙包括14符号。或者,迷你时隙包括3符号,预设重复次数K可以为2、3或4。或者,迷你时隙包括4符号,预设重复次数K可以为2或3。或者,迷你时隙包括5符号,预设重复次数K可以为2。或者,迷你时隙包括6符号,预设重复次数K可以为2。或者,迷你时隙包括7符号,预设重复次数K可以为2。Exemplarily, it is assumed that one slot includes 14 symbols. If the mini-slot includes 2 symbols, the preset number of repetitions K may be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. Correspondingly, 2 mini-slots include 2 symbols, 3 mini-slots include 6 symbols, 4 mini-slots include 8 symbols, 5 mini-slots include 10 symbols, 6 mini-slots include 12 symbols, and 7 The mini-slot includes 14 symbols. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 3 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be 2, 3, or 4. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 4 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be 2 or 3. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 5 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be 2. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 6 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be two. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 7 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K may be two.
下面分别以M的不同取值对确定TBS的方法进行说明。The method of determining the TBS will be described below with different values of M, respectively.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,发送设备可以根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小,即M=K。具体的,可以包括以下步骤:In a first possible implementation manner, the sending device may determine the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots and the modulation and coding mode, that is, M = K. Specifically, it may include the following steps:
第一,确定K个迷你时隙包括的RE数。具体的,利用公式六
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000014
确定K个迷你时隙包括的RE数。其中,N RE″表示K个迷你时隙包括的RE数;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000015
表示一个PRB中频域上的载波数,或者基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所占用的时域单位所对应的载波数,例如,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000016
时域单元也可以称为时间单元,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000017
表示K个迷你时隙内重复的所有PUSCH或PDSCH占用的符号数,例如,一个迷你时隙包括2个符号,K=4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000018
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000019
表示一个PRB中DMRS所占的RE数,包括DMRS开销,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000020
表示是由高层参数PUSCH-servingcellconfig中的xOverhead参数配置的开销。
First, determine the number of REs included in the K mini-slots. Specifically, using formula six
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000014
Determine the number of REs included in the K mini-slots. Among them, N RE ″ represents the number of REs included in the K mini-slots;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000015
Represents the number of carriers in the frequency domain of a PRB, or the number of carriers corresponding to the time domain unit occupied by repeated transmission of data based on mini-slots. For example,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000016
Time domain units can also be called time units,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000017
Represents the number of symbols occupied by all PUSCH or PDSCH repeated in K mini-slots. For example, a mini-slot includes 2 symbols, K = 4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000018
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000019
Represents the number of REs occupied by DMRS in a PRB, including DMRS overhead.
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000020
Represents the overhead configured by the xOverhead parameter in the higher layer parameter PUSCH-servingcellconfig.
第二,根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数确定用于计算TBS的RE数。具体的,通过公式七N RE=min(156,N RE″)·n PRB获取用于计算TBS的RE数,其中,N RE表示用于计算TBS的RE数,n PRB表示PRB的个数。 Second, the number of REs used to calculate the TBS is determined according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots. Specifically, the number of REs used to calculate TBS is obtained by formula N RE = min (156, N RE ″) · n PRB , where N RE represents the number of REs used to calculate TBS and n PRB represents the number of PRBs.
第三,根据用于计算TBS的RE数确定TBS。具体的,通过公式三N info=N RE·R·Q m·υ得到信息比特数。其中,Q m为调制阶数,R为码率,Q m和R是通过DCI中的MCS 域所指示的值在协议中查表得到。υ表示母码码率。如果N info≤3824,通过公式四
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000021
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000022
在协议中查表得到不小于N′ info最近的一个值作为TBS;或者,如果N info>3824,通过公式五
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000023
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000024
如果码率R≤1/4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000025
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000026
否则,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000027
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000028
C表示编码块的数目。
Third, the TBS is determined based on the number of REs used to calculate the TBS. Specifically, the number of information bits is obtained by formula three N info = N RE · R · Q m · υ. Among them, Q m is the modulation order, R is the code rate, and Q m and R are obtained by looking up the table in the protocol through the value indicated by the MCS field in the DCI. υ represents the mother code rate. If N info ≤3824, by formula four
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000021
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000022
Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; or, if N info > 3824, use formula 5
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000023
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000024
If the bit rate R≤1 / 4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000025
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000026
otherwise,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000027
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000028
C represents the number of coding blocks.
可选的,不仅可以通过上述公式三至公式五获取TBS,也可以根据RE数和调制编码方式查表获得TBS。具体地,根据用于计算TBS的RE数和调制编码方式的索引查询传输块大小表格(transport block size table,TBST)获取TBS。如表1所示。Optionally, not only the TBS can be obtained through the above formulas 3 to 5, but also the TBS can be obtained by looking up a table according to the RE number and modulation and coding mode. Specifically, the TBS is obtained by querying a transport block size table (transport block size table, TBST) according to an index used to calculate the RE number of the TBS and the modulation and coding method. As shown in Table 1.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000029
上述表1中的TBS的取值是由调制编码方式、用于计算TBS的RE数和开销(overhead)决定的。如N TBS=N RE*coderate*Q m-overhead,并将计算的数值向上取整。其中,N TBS表示的取值,N RE表示RE数,coderate表示目标码率,Q m表示调制阶数,overhead表示开销。其中,开销可以为参考信号的开销和/或系统损耗。目标码率和调制阶数可以从NR R15协议38.213中的MCS表格中获取。例如,表2所示。 The value of TBS in Table 1 above is determined by the modulation and coding mode, the number of REs used to calculate the TBS, and the overhead. For example, N TBS = N RE * coderate * Q m -overhead, and the calculated value is rounded up. Among them, N TBS represents the value, N RE represents the RE number, coderate represents the target code rate, Q m represents the modulation order, and overhead represents the overhead. The overhead may be an overhead of a reference signal and / or a system loss. The target bit rate and modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table in the NR R15 protocol 38.213. For example, as shown in Table 2.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000031
其中,当配置了高层参数PUSCH-tp-pi2BPSK时,即调制方式为(pi/2)BPSK,调制阶数为1时,q=1,其余情况下q=2。When the high-layer parameter PUSCH-tp-pi2BPSK is configured, that is, when the modulation mode is (pi / 2) BPSK and the modulation order is 1, q = 1, and q = 2 in other cases.
在现有技术中,如果直接配置整块资源(如一个时隙或者n个时隙)用于传输TB对应的数据,当在该整块资源中传输错过了第一次传输时机(transmission occasion,TO),则需要错过配置的该整块资源,在下一个整块资源再传输TB对应的数据。对于下行传输,所谓错过指该整块资源的开始是上行符号而不能传输下行数据。示例性的,如图1所示,时隙n的符号4为上行符号,如果需要在符号4上传输下行数据,就需要错过整个时隙n,等待到达时隙n+1时,如果时隙n+1的符号4为下行符号,则可以在时隙n+1的符号4上传输下行数据。同理,对于上行传输,所谓错过指该整块资源的开始是下行符号而不能传输上行数据。或者,该整块资源为免授权(grant free) 资源。所谓传输时机可以理解为传输副本的时机,副本可以指需要重复传输的数据。第一次传输时机指第一次传输副本的时机。第一副本指第一次传输的数据。In the prior art, if an entire block of resources (such as one timeslot or n timeslots) is directly configured to transmit data corresponding to TB, when transmission in the entire block of resources misses the first transmission opportunity (transmission occasions, TO), you need to miss the configured whole block of resources, and then transmit the data corresponding to TB at the next whole block of resources. For downlink transmission, the so-called miss means that the beginning of the entire resource is an uplink symbol and cannot transmit downlink data. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 1, symbol 4 of slot n is an uplink symbol. If downlink data needs to be transmitted on symbol 4, you need to miss the entire slot n. When you wait to reach slot n + 1, if the slot The symbol 4 of the n + 1 is a downlink symbol, and the downlink data can be transmitted on the symbol 4 of the time slot n + 1. Similarly, for uplink transmission, the so-called miss means that the beginning of the entire resource is a downlink symbol and cannot transmit uplink data. Alternatively, the entire resource is a grant-free resource. The so-called transmission timing can be understood as the timing of transmitting a copy, and the copy can refer to data that needs to be transmitted repeatedly. The first transmission timing refers to the first transmission timing. The first copy refers to the first transmitted data.
但是,基于迷你时隙重复传输数据时可以实现传输起点的灵活性。K中第一次传输时机为t,第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。例如,在重复传输K次副本时,若基于迷你时隙重复传输数据时的第一个副本在第一个迷你时隙的第一个符号无法发送,例如第一个迷你时隙的第一个符号为下行符号,无法传输上行数据,则可以推迟到下一个传输时机传输(比如第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号)传输第一个副本,以此类推直到推迟到能够传输第一副本的迷你时隙。若在K个迷你时隙所在的时隙中未确定到传输时机,则在下一个时隙中再确定传输时。示例性的,如图2所示,时隙n中的第一个迷你时隙的符号4为上行符号,如果需要在符号4上传输下行数据,就需要错过第一个迷你时隙,等待到达第二迷你时隙时,如果第二迷你时隙的符号8为下行符号,则可以在第二迷你时隙的符号8上传输下行数据。However, the flexibility of the starting point of transmission can be achieved when data is repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slots. The first transmission opportunity in K is t, and the first transmission opportunity is the first time to send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. For example, when transmitting K copies repeatedly, the first symbol of the first copy in the first mini slot cannot be sent if the first copy is repeatedly transmitted based on the mini slot, such as the first of the first mini slot The symbol is a downlink symbol. If uplink data cannot be transmitted, the first copy can be postponed to the next transmission opportunity (such as the first symbol of the second mini-slot), and so on until the first copy can be transmitted. Mini time slot. If the transmission timing is not determined in the time slot where the K mini-slots are located, then the transmission time is determined in the next time slot. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, symbol 4 of the first mini-slot in slot n is an uplink symbol. If downlink data needs to be transmitted on symbol 4, you need to miss the first mini-slot and wait for it to arrive. In the second mini-slot, if the symbol 8 of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, downlink data can be transmitted on the symbol 8 of the second mini-slot.
需要说明的是,在一种可能的实现方式中,K个迷你时隙包括的符号数是基于调度的传输(grant-based),即在确定TBS时选取的时域资源为一个时隙中K次重复被调度的符号数,S=K-t+1,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数。示例性的,如图2所示,K=2,t=1,S=1,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数为1次。或者,如图6所示,假设一个迷你时隙包括2个符号,K=4,t=2,S=3,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数为3次。It should be noted that, in a possible implementation manner, the number of symbols included in the K mini-slots is grant-based, that is, the time domain resource selected when determining the TBS is K in one slot. The number of symbols scheduled to be repeated twice, S = K-t + 1, means the actual number of repetitions of repeatedly transmitting the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots in the time slot. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 2, K = 2, t = 1, and S = 1, which means that the actual number of repetitions of repeatedly transmitting data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot in the time slot is one. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 6, it is assumed that a mini-slot includes 2 symbols, K = 4, t = 2, and S = 3, which means that the actual repetition of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted in the slot The number of times is 3.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,K个迷你时隙包括的符号数是基于免调度的传输(grant-free),在确定TBS时选取的时域资源为一个时隙中K次重复所需的符号数,S=K,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际次数。所谓“所需”的符号数为K次重复的时频资源不是由网络设备动态调度的,而是在预配置的免调度时频资源上直接传输。示例性的,如图7所示,假设一个迷你时隙包括2个符号,K=4,t=2,S=4,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数为4次。可以使用第五个迷你时隙传输第四个副本。可选的,实际传输K次副本,K个迷你时隙占用的符号可以横跨两个时隙。示例的,如图8所示,假设一个迷你时隙包括4个符号,K=4,t=2,S=4,表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数为4次。第二个传输块所使用的后两个符号,以及第三个传输块和第四个传输块使用的符号均是时隙n+1中的符号。In another possible implementation, the number of symbols included in the K mini-slots is based on grant-free. The time-domain resource selected when determining the TBS is required for K repetitions in a slot. The number of symbols, S = K, represents the actual number of times that data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots are repeatedly transmitted in the time slot. The time-frequency resources whose so-called "required" number of symbols are K repetitions are not dynamically scheduled by the network equipment, but are transmitted directly on the pre-configured scheduling-free time-frequency resources. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7, it is assumed that a mini-slot includes 2 symbols, K = 4, t = 2, and S = 4, which means that data transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted in the slot The actual number of repetitions is four. A fourth copy can be transmitted using the fifth mini-slot. Optionally, K copies are actually transmitted, and the symbols occupied by the K mini-slots may span two slots. By way of example, as shown in FIG. 8, suppose a mini-slot includes 4 symbols, K = 4, t = 2, and S = 4, which means that the actual transmission of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot in a timeslot is repeated. The number of repetitions is 4 times. The last two symbols used by the second transport block, and the symbols used by the third transport block and the fourth transport block are the symbols in time slot n + 1.
此外,在现有技术中,如果基于时隙重复传输数据时,实际重复次数小于预配置重复次数的情况下,实际重复次数的误包率小于预配置重复次数的误包率。假设一次传输的误包率(block error rate,BLER)为10 -1,可以通过四次重复实现误包率为10 -4。但是,实际重复次数为3次,只能实现可靠性误包率为10 -3。因此,当无法保证预配置重复次数时,传输的可靠性会受到影响。但是,本申请实施例所述的基于迷你时隙重复传输数据,实现传输起点的灵活性,下一个传输时机可能还在本时隙内,因此,可以同样实现K次重复传输,或者K-t+1次传输,保证预配置重复次数时,也保证了传输的可靠性,可以有效地提高可靠性。即使实际重复次数小于预配置重复次数,传 输的可靠性也高于现有技术中预配置重复次数减少时的可靠性。 In addition, in the prior art, if data is repeatedly transmitted based on a time slot, when the actual number of repetitions is less than the pre-configured number of repetitions, the packet error rate of the actual number of repetitions is less than the pre-configured number of packets. Assume that the block error rate (BLER) of one transmission is 10 -1 , and the packet error rate of 10 -4 can be achieved through four repetitions. However, the actual number of repetitions is 3 times, and only a reliable packet error rate of 10 -3 can be achieved. Therefore, when the number of pre-configured repetitions cannot be guaranteed, the reliability of the transmission is affected. However, according to the embodiment of the present application, data is repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slots to realize the flexibility of the starting point of transmission. The next transmission timing may still be in this time slot. Therefore, K repeated transmissions can also be implemented, or K-t +1 transmission guarantees the reliability of the transmission when the pre-configured repetition times are guaranteed, which can effectively improve the reliability. Even if the actual number of repetitions is less than the number of pre-configured repetitions, the reliability of the transmission is higher than the reliability when the number of pre-configured repetitions is reduced in the prior art.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,发送设备可以根据1个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小,即M=1。具体的,与上述第一种可能的实现方式的区域在于,确定K个迷你时隙包括的RE数时,使用的是1个迷你时隙内重复的所有PUSCH或PDSCH占用的符号数,其他方法步骤可以参考第一种可能的实现方式中的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。In a second possible implementation manner, the sending device may determine the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in one mini-slot and the modulation and coding mode, that is, M = 1. Specifically, the area with the first possible implementation manner described above lies in that when determining the number of REs included in K mini-slots, the number of symbols occupied by all PUSCH or PDSCH repeated in 1 mini-slot is used. Other methods For the steps, reference may be made to the detailed description in the first possible implementation manner, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
在现有技术中,基于时隙重复传输数据的情况下,每个时隙中有1~2个符号用于承载DMRS。而基于迷你时隙传输数据的情况下,迷你时隙的单位较小,一般为2,4或者7个符号。如果同样使用迷你时隙包括的符号中的1~2个符号承载DMRS,对于迷你时隙调度来说开销过大。因此一种共享DMRS(DMRS sharing)的方法被提出。具体地,无需为每个迷你时隙都配置或者调度DMRS,而是为一个迷你时隙配置或调度DMRS,若干个迷你时隙共享此DMRS,接收设备接收到该DMRS后对物理信道进行信道估计,如图9所示,分别在第一个迷你时隙和第三个迷你时隙中的第一个符号配置DMRS,第二个迷你时隙可以共用第一个迷你时隙中的第一个符号配置的DMRS,第四个迷你时隙可以共用第三个迷你时隙中的第一个符号配置的DMRS,以便接收设备正确解调承载在前述若干个迷你时隙上的PUCCH或PUSCH。In the prior art, in the case of repeatedly transmitting data based on time slots, there are 1 to 2 symbols in each time slot for carrying a DMRS. In the case of transmitting data based on mini-slots, the units of mini-slots are small, generally 2, 4, or 7 symbols. If 1 to 2 symbols in the symbols included in the mini-slot are also used to carry the DMRS, the overhead for mini-slot scheduling is excessive. Therefore, a method of sharing DMRS (DMRS sharing) is proposed. Specifically, there is no need to configure or schedule DMRS for each mini-slot, but configure or schedule DMRS for one mini-slot. Several mini-slots share this DMRS, and the receiving device performs channel estimation on the physical channel after receiving the DMRS. As shown in Figure 9, the DMRS is configured in the first symbol of the first mini-slot and the third mini-slot, respectively, and the second mini-slot can share the first of the first mini-slot For the symbol-configured DMRS, the fourth mini-slot can share the first symbol-configured DMRS in the third mini-slot, so that the receiving device can correctly demodulate the PUCCH or PUSCH carried on the aforementioned mini-slots.
在这种情况下,第一个迷你时隙和第三个迷你时隙中只有一个符号可以用于传输PUCCH或PUSCH,第二个迷你时隙和第四个迷你时隙中可以使用两个符号可以用于传输PUCCH或PUSCH,导致确定基于迷你时隙重复的TBS时,承载DMRS的迷你时隙和不承载DMRS的迷你时隙的TBS是不同的。In this case, only one symbol in the first mini-slot and the third mini-slot can be used to transmit PUCCH or PUSCH, and two symbols can be used in the second and fourth mini-slots When it can be used to transmit PUCCH or PUSCH, which results in the determination of TBS based on mini-slot repetition, the mini-slots carrying DMRS and the TBSs that do not carry DMRS are different.
在本申请实施例中,可以为基于迷你时隙重复的迷你时隙配置关联的标度因子,标度因子与其关联的迷你时隙上的符号是否有符号承载DMRS有关。例如,根据1个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小之后,若P个迷你时隙对应的符号承载有DMRS,根据第一标度因子调整TBS得到第一调整后的TBS,第一标度因子大于1,P为整数,P大于或等于1,且小于K。若第一时间单元对应的所有符号用于承载PUSCH或PDSCH,根据第二标度因子调整TBS得到第二调整后的TBS,第二标度因子小于1。标度因子可以是可以通过高层参数预先配置,也可以是由DCI动态指示。从而,保证当选取1个迷你时隙包括的RE数用于计算基于迷你时隙重复的TBS时,该副本本身的TBS与标度因子相乘所得到的TBS与所有重复副本的平均TBS一致,用调整后的TBS来作为基于迷你时隙重复的TBS。In the embodiment of the present application, the associated mini-slot based on the mini-slot repetition may be configured with an associated scaling factor, and the scaling factor is related to whether the symbols on the associated mini-slot have a symbol bearing DMRS. For example, after determining the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in a mini-slot and the modulation and coding method, if the symbols corresponding to the P mini-slots carry DMRS, adjust the TBS according to the first scale factor to obtain the first adjusted TBS. , The first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K. If all symbols corresponding to the first time unit are used to carry the PUSCH or PDSCH, the TBS is adjusted according to the second scale factor to obtain the second adjusted TBS, and the second scale factor is less than 1. The scaling factor may be pre-configured through high-level parameters, or may be dynamically indicated by DCI. Therefore, it is guaranteed that when the number of REs included in a mini-slot is used to calculate the TBS based on the mini-slot repetition, the TBS obtained by multiplying the TBS of the replica by the scale factor is consistent with the average TBS of all duplicate replicas. The adjusted TBS is used as the TBS based on mini-slot repetition.
S502、终端设备重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S502. The terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
将TBS对应的比特数映射到一个迷你时隙对应的符号上,通过S个迷你时隙重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。在实际传输数据的过程中,可以根据预配置重复次数基于迷你时隙重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据K次,也可以根据少于预配置重复次数基于迷你时隙重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据。S表示在时隙内重复传输承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的实际重复次数。The number of bits corresponding to the TBS is mapped to the symbol corresponding to a mini-slot, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted S times through the S mini-slots. S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K. During the actual data transmission, the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot can be repeatedly sent K times based on the pre-configured repetition times, or it can be repeatedly sent based on the mini-slot based on the pre-configured repetitions. Data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot. S represents the actual number of repetitive transmissions of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot in the time slot.
S503、网络设备接收S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S503. The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
S504、网络设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。S504. The network device determines the TBS according to the number of REs included in the M mini-slots and the modulation and coding mode.
S503的具体解释可以参考S501的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For the specific explanation of S503, reference may be made to the detailed description of S501, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
S505、网络设备根据TBS解码迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S505. The network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the TBS.
可以根据调制编码方式解调和解码数据,具体的可以参考现有技术,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。Data can be demodulated and decoded according to the modulation and coding mode. For details, reference may be made to the existing technology, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
另外,基于迷你时隙重复传输数据与基于时隙重复传输数据的主要区别在于,第一,承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据可以在连续的时隙内传输,且在连续的不同的时隙内传输所使用的符号不同;第二,承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据重复传输所使用的迷你时隙也是连续的;第三,在一个时隙内至少有两个副本的部分或全部。In addition, the main difference between repeated transmission of data based on mini-slots and repeated transmission of data based on time-slots is that, first, the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots can be transmitted in consecutive time slots, and at different times. The symbols used in the slot transmission are different. Second, the mini-slots used for repeated transmission of data on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots are also continuous. Third, there are at least two copies of a part or All.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小,或者根据1个迷你时隙包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定传输块大小,从而,能够在不超过计算TBS所采用的符号数上限的前提下利用基于迷你时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application determines the transmission block size according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots and the modulation and coding method, or determines the transmission block according to the number of REs included in the mini-slot and the modulation and coding method. Therefore, the TBS can be calculated using the symbols occupied by all transmission blocks or part of the transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions based on mini-slot repetition without exceeding the upper limit of the number of symbols used in calculating the TBS.
可选择的,在实际应用中,基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所需的时域资源也可以超过一个时隙包括的时频资源。示例性的,假设一个时隙包括14个符号。若迷你时隙包括2符号,预设重复次数K至少为8次。相应的,8个迷你时隙包括16符号,8个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长。或者,迷你时隙包括3符号,预设重复次数K至少为5次。相应的,5个迷你时隙包括15符号,5个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长。或者,迷你时隙包括4符号,预设重复次数K至少为4次。或者,迷你时隙包括5符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。或者,迷你时隙包括6符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。或者,迷你时隙包括7符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。下面对基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所需的时域资源也可以超过一个时隙包括的时频资源的情况下确定传输块大小的方法进行举例说明。Optionally, in practical applications, the time domain resources required for repeated transmission of data based on mini time slots may also exceed the time frequency resources included in one time slot. Exemplarily, it is assumed that one slot includes 14 symbols. If the mini-slot includes 2 symbols, the preset number of repetitions K is at least 8 times. Correspondingly, the 8 mini-slots include 16 symbols, and the duration of the 8 mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 3 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 5 times. Correspondingly, the five mini-slots include 15 symbols, and the duration of the five mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 4 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 4 times. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 5 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 6 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 7 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. The method for determining the transmission block size in the case that the time domain resources required for repeated transmission of data based on mini time slots may also exceed the time frequency resources included in one time slot is described below.
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图二。在本申请实施例中,假设基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所需的时域资源超过一个时隙。如图10所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 10 is a second flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the time domain resources required to repeatedly transmit data based on the mini-slots exceed one time slot. As shown in FIG. 10, the method may include:
S1001、终端设备根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。S1001. The terminal device determines the TBS according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,参考时长可以等于时隙的时长。示例性的,如图11所示,假设一个时隙包括14个符号;一个迷你时隙包括4个符号,K=4,4个迷你时隙包括16个符号,则4个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长,即第4个迷你时隙的后两个符号不属于时隙n的符号,为时隙n+1的第一个符号(符号0)和第二个符号(符号1)。在这种情况下,可以根据一个时隙内PUSCH或PDSCH调度的符号数确定一个时隙中的RE数,再根据一个时隙中的RE数确定计算TBS的RE数,以及根据计算TBS的RE数确定TBS。具体的可以参考S501中的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the reference duration may be equal to the duration of the time slot. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that one time slot includes 14 symbols; one mini time slot includes 4 symbols, K = 4, and 4 mini time slots include 16 symbols, so the duration of the four mini time slots Greater than one time slot, that is, the last two symbols of the fourth mini-slot do not belong to the symbol of time slot n, and are the first symbol (symbol 0) and the second symbol (symbol 1) of time slot n + 1 ). In this case, the number of REs in a time slot can be determined according to the number of symbols scheduled by PUSCH or PDSCH in a time slot, and then the number of REs for calculating TBS is determined based on the number of REs in one time slot, and the RE for calculating TBS is calculated. The number determines the TBS. For details, reference may be made to the detailed description in S501, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,参考时长等于R个迷你时隙的时长,其中,R为小于K的最大整数,且参考时长小于时隙的时长。In another possible implementation manner, the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R mini-slots, where R is a maximum integer less than K and the reference duration is less than the duration of the timeslot.
示例性的,如图11所示,一个迷你时隙包括4个符号,K=4,在这种情况下,可以根据一个3个迷你时隙内PUSCH或PDSCH调度的符号数确定3个迷你时隙中的RE数,R=3,再根据3个迷你时隙中的RE数确定计算TBS的RE数,以及根据计算 TBS的RE数确定TBS。具体的可以参考S501中的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 11, one mini-slot includes 4 symbols, and K = 4. In this case, three mini-slots can be determined according to the number of PUSCH or PDSCH scheduling symbols in one 3 mini-slot. The number of REs in the slot, R = 3, and then the number of REs for calculating the TBS is determined according to the number of REs in the three mini-slots, and the TBS is determined according to the number of REs for calculating the TBS. For details, reference may be made to the detailed description in S501, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
另外,基于迷你时隙重复传输数据时可以实现传输起点的灵活性。K中第一次传输时机为t,第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。例如,如图11所示,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于3。但是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号4)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号4)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据,如图12所示。以此类推直到推迟到能够传输第一副本的迷你时隙。In addition, the flexibility of the starting point of transmission can be achieved when data is repeatedly transmitted based on mini-slots. The first transmission opportunity in K is t, and the first transmission opportunity is the first time to send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as uplink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first A mini-slot can be used to transmit uplink data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R may be equal to three. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot When the first symbol (symbol 4) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, if the first symbol (symbol 4) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data, as shown in Figure 12. And so on until it is deferred to a mini-slot capable of transmitting the first copy.
若迷你时隙包括2符号,预设重复次数K至少为8次。相应的,8个迷你时隙包括16符号,8个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长。若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于7。但是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号2)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号2)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。If the mini-slot includes 2 symbols, the preset number of repetitions K is at least 8 times. Correspondingly, the 8 mini-slots include 16 symbols, and the duration of the 8 mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot. If symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be transmitted for the first time, at this time, t = 1, which means that the first mini-slot can be used for Transmit upstream data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R may be equal to 7. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot When the first symbol (symbol 2) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, if the first symbol (symbol 2) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data.
或者,迷你时隙包括3符号,预设重复次数K至少为5次。相应的,5个迷你时隙包括15符号,5个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长。若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于4。但是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号3)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号3)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 3 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 5 times. Correspondingly, the five mini-slots include 15 symbols, and the duration of the five mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot. If symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be transmitted for the first time, at this time, t = 1, which means that the first mini-slot can be used for Transmit upstream data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R may be equal to 4. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot , Determine whether the first symbol (symbol 3) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol. If the first symbol (symbol 3) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data.
或者,迷你时隙包括5符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于2。但 是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号5)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号5)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 5 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. If symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be transmitted for the first time, at this time, t = 1, which means that the first mini-slot can be used for Transmit upstream data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R can be equal to two. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot When the first symbol (symbol 5) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, if the first symbol (symbol 5) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data.
或者,迷你时隙包括6符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于2。但是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号6)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号6)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 6 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. If symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be transmitted for the first time, at this time, t = 1, which means that the first mini-slot can be used for Transmit upstream data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R can be equal to two. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot When the first symbol (symbol 6) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, if the first symbol (symbol 6) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data.
或者,迷你时隙包括7符号,预设重复次数K至少为3次。若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为上行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输上行数据。同理,若时隙n中的符号0为下行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,此时,t=1,表示第一个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。相应的,R可以等于2。但是,若时隙n中的符号0为上行符号,同时需要第一次发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据为下行数据,在这种情况下,需要等待到达第二个迷你时隙时,确定第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号7)是否为下行符号,若第二个迷你时隙的第一个符号(符号7)为下行符号,t=2,表示第二个迷你时隙可以用于传输下行数据。Alternatively, the mini-slot includes 7 symbols, and the preset number of repetitions K is at least 3 times. If symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be transmitted for the first time, at this time, t = 1, which means that the first mini-slot can be used for Transmit upstream data. Similarly, if the symbol 0 in slot n is a downlink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, at this time, t = 1, indicating the first mini-slot Can be used to transmit downlink data. Accordingly, R can be equal to two. However, if symbol 0 in slot n is an uplink symbol, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot needs to be sent for the first time as downlink data, in this case, you need to wait to reach the second mini-slot , Determine whether the first symbol (symbol 7) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, and if the first symbol (symbol 7) of the second mini-slot is a downlink symbol, t = 2, indicating the second Mini-slots can be used to transmit downlink data.
S1002、终端设备重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1002. The terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
将TBS对应的比特数映射到一个迷你时隙对应的符号上,通过S个迷你时隙重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。在实际传输数据的过程中,可以根据预配置重复次数基于迷你时隙重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据K次,也可以根据少于预配置重复次数基于迷你时隙重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上的数据。The number of bits corresponding to the TBS is mapped to the symbol corresponding to a mini-slot, and the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted S times through the S mini-slots. S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K. During the actual data transmission, the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot can be repeatedly sent K times based on the pre-configured repetition times, or it can be repeatedly sent based on the mini-slot based on less than the pre-configured repetitions. Data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot.
S1003、网络设备接收S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1003. The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
S1004、网络设备根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS。S1004. The network device determines the TBS according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method.
S1004的具体解释可以参考S1001的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For a specific explanation of S1004, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1001, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
S1005、网络设备根据TBS解码迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1005. The network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the TBS.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,K个迷你时隙的时长大于一个时隙的时长的情况下,可以根据参考时长对应的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,从而,能够利用基于迷你时隙重复的预设重复次数中的全部传输块或部分传输块占用的符号计算TBS。In the method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiment of the present application, when the duration of the K mini-slots is greater than the duration of one slot, the TBS can be determined according to the RE number corresponding to the reference duration and the modulation and coding method. The symbol occupied by all transmission blocks or a part of transmission blocks in a preset number of repetitions of a mini-slot repeat is calculated as TBS.
对于下行信号传输,发送设备是网络设备,对应的接收设备是终端设备,TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为下行数据。对于下行信号传输过程中确定传输块大小的过程可以是将图5和图10的执行主体互换即可,详细解释可 以参考图5和图10所示的方法步骤,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For downlink signal transmission, the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device. The TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data. For the process of determining the transmission block size in the downlink signal transmission process, the execution bodies of FIG. 5 and FIG. 10 may be interchanged. For detailed explanation, reference may be made to the method steps shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 10. More details.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,分别从终端设备、网络设备、以及终端设备和网络设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如终端设备、网络设备为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,终端设备和网络设备包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。In the above-mentioned embodiments provided in the present application, the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are described from the perspectives of terminal equipment, network equipment, and interaction between the terminal equipment and the network equipment. It can be understood that, in order to implement each function in the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, each network element, such as a terminal device and a network device, includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in combination with the algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对终端设备、网络设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In the embodiment of the present application, functional modules may be divided into terminal equipment and network equipment according to the foregoing method examples. For example, functional modules may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图13示出了上述和实施例中涉及的确定传输块大小的装置的一种可能的组成示例图一,该确定传输块大小的装置能执行本申请各方法实施例中任一方法实施例中终端设备所执行的步骤。如图13所示,所述确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现实施例中提供的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置可以是芯片系统。该确定传输块大小的装置可以包括:处理单元1301、发送单元1302和接收单元1303。In a case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 13 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments. FIG. 1 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13, the device for determining a transmission block size is a terminal device or a device for supporting a terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment to determine a transmission block size. For example, the device for determining a transmission block size may be a chip system. The apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 1301, a sending unit 1302, and a receiving unit 1303.
对于上行信号传输,其中,处理单元1301,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,处理单元1301,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S501,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1001。For uplink signal transmission, the processing unit 1301 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform a method described in an embodiment of the present application. For example, the processing unit 1301 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S501 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1001 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
发送单元1302,用于发送数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S502,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1002。The sending unit 1302 is configured to send data. For example, the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S502 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1002 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG.
对于下行信号传输,其中,接收单元1303,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,接收单元1303,用于接收数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S503,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1003。For downlink signal transmission, the receiving unit 1303 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the receiving unit 1303 is configured to receive data. For example, the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S503 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and the method in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1003.
处理单元1301,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S504和S505,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1004和S1005。A processing unit 1301 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S504 and S505 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and S1004 and S100 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1005.
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of each step involved in the foregoing method embodiments can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的装置,用于执行上述任意实施例的方法,因此可以达到与上述实施例的方法相同的效果。The apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
接收单元对应的实体设备可以为接收器,发送单元对应的实体设备可以为发射器, 处理单元对应的实体设备可以为处理器。The physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图14示出了上述和实施例中涉及的确定传输块大小的装置的一种可能的组成示例图二,该确定传输块大小的装置能执行本申请各方法实施例中任一方法实施例中网络设备所执行的步骤。如图14所示,所述确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现实施例中提供的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置可以是芯片系统。该确定传输块大小的装置可以包括:处理单元1401、发送单元1402和接收单元1403。In a case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 14 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments. FIG. 2 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by a network device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14, the device for determining the size of a transmission block is a network device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports the method provided in the embodiment by the network device. For example, the device for determining the size of the transmission block may be a chip system. The apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 1401, a sending unit 1402, and a receiving unit 1403.
对于上行信号传输,其中,接收单元1403,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,接收单元1403,用于接收数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S503,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1003。For uplink signal transmission, the receiving unit 1403 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the receiving unit 1403 is configured to receive data. For example, the device for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S503 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1003.
处理单元1401,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S504和S505,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1004和S1005。The processing unit 1401 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S504 and S505 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 5, and S1004 and S100 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 10. S1005.
对于下行信号传输,其中,处理单元1401,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,处理单元1401,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S501,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1001。For downlink signal transmission, the processing unit 1401 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the processing unit 1401 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S501 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1001 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
发送单元1402,用于发送数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图5所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S502,图10所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1002。The sending unit 1402 is configured to send data. For example, the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S502 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 5 and S1002 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 10.
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of each step involved in the foregoing method embodiments can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的装置,用于执行上述任意实施例的方法,因此可以达到与上述实施例的方法相同的效果。The apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
接收单元对应的实体设备可以为接收器,发送单元对应的实体设备可以为发射器,处理单元对应的实体设备可以为处理器。The physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
图15示出了上述实施例中所涉及的网络设备的一种可能的结构示意图。FIG. 15 shows a possible structural diagram of a network device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
网络设备包括发射器/接收器1501、控制器/处理器1502和存储器1503。所述发射器/接收器1501用于支持网络设备与上述实施例中的所述的终端设备之间收发信息。所述控制器/处理器1502执行各种用于与终端设备通信的功能。在上行链路,来自所述终端设备的上行链路信号经由天线接收,由接收器1501进行调解,并进一步由控制器/处理器1502进行处理来恢复终端设备所发送到业务数据和信令信息。在下行链路上,业务数据和信令消息由控制器/处理器1502进行处理,并由发射器1501进行调解来产生下行链路信号,并经由天线发射给终端设备。控制器/处理器1502还执行图5和图10中涉及网络设备的处理过程和/或用于本申请所描述的技术的其他过程。存储器1503用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。The network device includes a transmitter / receiver 1501, a controller / processor 1502, and a memory 1503. The transmitter / receiver 1501 is configured to support transmitting and receiving information between a network device and the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. The controller / processor 1502 performs various functions for communicating with a terminal device. In the uplink, the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, mediated by the receiver 1501, and further processed by the controller / processor 1502 to recover the service data and signaling information sent by the terminal device . On the downlink, the service data and signaling messages are processed by the controller / processor 1502 and mediated by the transmitter 1501 to generate a downlink signal and transmitted to the terminal device via the antenna. The controller / processor 1502 also performs the processing procedures involving network devices in FIG. 5 and FIG. 10 and / or other procedures for the techniques described in this application. The memory 1503 is configured to store program code and data of a network device.
图16示出了上述实施例中所涉及的终端设备的一种可能的设计结构的简化示意图。所述终端设备包括发射器1601,接收器1602,控制器/处理器1603,存储器1604和调制解调处理器1605。FIG. 16 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of the terminal device involved in the foregoing embodiment. The terminal device includes a transmitter 1601, a receiver 1602, a controller / processor 1603, a memory 1604, and a modem processor 1605.
发射器1601用于发送上行链路信号(重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据),该上行链路信号经由天线发射给上述实施例中所述的网络设备。在下行链路上,天线接收上述实施例中网络设备发射的下行链路信号(重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据)。接收器1602用于接收从天线接收到的下行链路信号(S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据)。在调制解调处理器1605中,编码器1606接收要在上行链路上发送的业务数据和信令消息,并对业务数据和信令消息进行处理。调制器1607进一步处理(例如,符号映射和调制)编码后的业务数据和信令消息并提供输出采样。解调器1609处理(例如,解调)该输入采样并提供符号估计。解码器1608处理(例如,解码)该符号估计并提供发送给终端设备的已解码的数据和信令消息。编码器1606、调制器1607、解调器1609和解码器1608可以由合成的调制解调处理器1605来实现。这些单元根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术来进行处理。The transmitter 1601 is configured to send an uplink signal (send data transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit repeatedly S times), and the uplink signal is transmitted to the network device described in the foregoing embodiment via an antenna. On the downlink, the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the network device in the above embodiment (repeatedly sending S data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit). The receiver 1602 is configured to receive a downlink signal received from an antenna (S times is carried on data on a symbol corresponding to a first time unit). In the modem processor 1605, the encoder 1606 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages. The modulator 1607 further processes (e.g., symbol maps and modulates) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples. A demodulator 1609 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates. The decoder 1608 processes (e.g., decodes) the symbol estimates and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device. The encoder 1606, the modulator 1607, the demodulator 1609, and the decoder 1608 may be implemented by a synthesized modem processor 1605. These units process according to the radio access technology used by the radio access network.
控制器/处理器1603对终端设备的动作进行控制管理,用于执行上述实施例中由终端设备进行的处理。例如用于控制终端设备根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,且根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据和/或本申请所描述的技术的其他过程。作为示例,控制器/处理器1603用于支持终端设备执行图5中的过程S501、图10中的过程S1001。The controller / processor 1603 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. For example, it is used to control the terminal device to determine the TBS according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and to decode the data on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit and / or other processes of the technology described in this application according to the TBS. As an example, the controller / processor 1603 is configured to support the terminal device to execute the process S501 in FIG. 5 and the process S1001 in FIG. 10.
在本申请实施例中,处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which may implement or The disclosed methods, steps and logic block diagrams in the embodiments of the present application are executed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as Random-access memory (RAM). The memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing program instructions and / or data.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated as required. Completed by different functional modules, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be divided. The combination can either be integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显 示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、终端或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal, or another programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like that includes one or more available medium integration. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, an SSD).
在上述各个实施例确定TBS的过程中,如果根据K次传输时机(transmission occasion),K次传输时机所占用的时频资源和网络设备指示的调制编码方式确定TBS,并将确定的TBS对应的TB承载于一个传输时机所占用的时频资源上传输,可以得到传输码率。传输码率也可以理解为将TBS对应的TB承载于一个传输时机所占用的时频资源上传输时的比特数。码率门限可以为一个传输时机所占用的时频资源能够承载的最大比特数。传输码率可能大于码率门限。例如,假设码率门限为1,一个传输时机所占用的时频资源能够承载的最大数据包为100比特。若传输码率为1.2,需要传输120比特的数据包,则一个传输时机所占用的时频资源无法完整地传输该120比特的数据包,数据包的不完整传输会导致接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,降低了传输效率,增大了传输时延。In the process of determining the TBS in each of the foregoing embodiments, if the TBS is determined according to K transmission occasions, the time-frequency resources occupied by the K transmission occasions and the modulation and coding method indicated by the network device, the TBS is determined, and the determined TBS corresponds to TB is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity, and the transmission bit rate can be obtained. The transmission bit rate can also be understood as the number of bits when transmitting the TB corresponding to the TBS on the time-frequency resource occupied by a transmission opportunity. The bit rate threshold can be the maximum number of bits that can be carried by the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission occasion. The transmission bit rate may be greater than the bit rate threshold. For example, assuming that the code rate threshold is 1, the maximum data packet that can be carried by the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity is 100 bits. If the transmission code rate is 1.2 and a 120-bit data packet needs to be transmitted, the time-frequency resources occupied by a transmission opportunity cannot completely transmit the 120-bit data packet. Incomplete transmission of the data packet will cause the receiver to fail to decode. One retransmission, thereby reducing transmission efficiency and increasing transmission delay.
在这种情况下,需要重新计算TBS,使TBS对应的TB承载于一个传输时机所占用的时频资源上传输时的参考码率小于或等于码率门限。另外,在下文中,传输时机可以理解为时间单元,时间单元可以为一个或两个以上OFDM符号。时间单元还可以是指传输时机或迷你时隙,具体的解释可以参考上述实施例中的解释,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。在本申请实施例中,假设第一时间单元为迷你时隙。基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所需的时域资源在一个时隙内。下面以上行信号传输为例对重新确定传输块大小的方法进行详细说明。In this case, the TBS needs to be recalculated so that the reference code rate when the TB corresponding to the TBS is transmitted on a time-frequency resource occupied by a transmission opportunity is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. In addition, in the following, the transmission timing may be understood as a time unit, and the time unit may be one or two or more OFDM symbols. The time unit may also refer to a transmission opportunity or a mini-slot. For a specific explanation, refer to the explanation in the foregoing embodiment, which is not repeatedly described in this embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the first time unit is a mini-slot. The time domain resources required to repeatedly transmit data based on mini-slots are in one slot. The method of re-determining the size of the transport block is described in detail below using the upper line signal transmission as an example.
在第一种可实现方式中,若参考码率大于码率门限,可以通过调整计算TBS所使用的迷你时隙的个数,克服参考码率大于码率门限。图17为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图三。如图17所示,该方法可以包括:In the first implementation, if the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the number of mini-slots used to calculate the TBS can be adjusted to overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold. FIG. 17 is a third flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17, the method may include:
S1701、终端设备根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS和参考码率。S1701. The terminal device determines the first TBS and the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K mini-slots.
首先,终端设备根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数和第一调制编码方式确定第一TBS。其中,K个迷你时隙也可以理解为K个传输时机。K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者DCI动态指示重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的次数。例如,网络设备通过DCI动态指示或者由高层参数配置的重复次数K,PUSCH在K个传输时机对应的时频资源上重复传输。“K表示预配置或者DCI动态指示重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的次数”也可以描述为K表示网络设备通知的重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的次数。第一调制编码方式可以是网络设备指示的。第一调制编码方式可以用于指示第一码率和第一调制阶数。例如,第一调制编码方式可以是MCS索引9。如表3所示,MCS索引9指示的调制阶数为2,即第一调制阶数为2,MCS索引9指示的码率为251/1024,即第一码率为251/1024。First, the terminal device determines the first TBS according to the number of REs included in the K mini-slots and the first modulation and coding mode. Among them, K mini-slots can also be understood as K transmission opportunities. K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents the number of times that the pre-configuration or DCI dynamic indication repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot. For example, the network device uses the DCI dynamic indication or the number of repetitions K configured by a high-level parameter, and the PUSCH is repeatedly transmitted on the time-frequency resources corresponding to the K transmission opportunities. "K represents the number of times the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted pre-configured or DCI indicates." K may also be described as the number of times the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot is repeatedly transmitted by the network device. The first modulation and coding mode may be indicated by the network device. The first modulation and coding method may be used to indicate a first code rate and a first modulation order. For example, the first modulation and coding scheme may be MCS index 9. As shown in Table 3, the modulation order indicated by MCS index 9 is 2, that is, the first modulation order is 2, and the code rate indicated by MCS index 9 is 251/1024, that is, the first code rate is 251/1024.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000033
示例的,可以采用如下公式八确定TBS:N TBS=cd*K*N RE*Q m,其中,N TBS表示TBS的取值,cd表示码率,例如,第一码率,N RE表示一个迷你时隙包括的RE数,或者N RE用于表示一个迷你时隙包括的用于传输数据或控制信息的RE数,Q m表示调制阶数,例如,第一调制阶数。 For example, the following formula 8 can be used to determine TBS: N TBS = cd * K * N RE * Q m , where N TBS represents the value of TBS and cd represents the bit rate, for example, the first bit rate and N RE represents a The number of REs included in the mini-slot, or N RE is used to indicate the number of REs included in one mini-slot to transmit data or control information, and Q m represents the modulation order, for example, the first modulation order.
然后,若终端设备将N TBS对应的TB承载于一个迷你时隙上传输时,相应的1次传输占用的时频资源为K次传输所占用的时频资源的1/K。若保证第一调制阶数不变,公式八可以整理为:
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000034
由此可以得出,参考码率可以为第一码率的K倍。但是,用一个迷你时隙发送该第一TBS对应的TB时,参考码率可能大于码率门限。假设第一码率为251/1024,K=4时,即1次传输占用的时频资源为4次传输所占用的时频资源的1/4,参考码率可以为(251*4)/1024=1004/1024。所述码率门限可以为现有协议(3GPP TS 38.214 v15.3.0,6.1.4.1节)MCS表格中的最大值。例如,MCS表格中的MCS索引27指示的目标码率772/1024。1004/1024大于772/1024,即参考码率大于码率门限。
Then, if the terminal device carries the TB corresponding to the N TBS on a mini time slot for transmission, the time-frequency resource occupied by the corresponding one transmission is 1 / K of the time-frequency resource occupied by the K transmissions. If the first modulation order is guaranteed to be constant, Equation 8 can be summarized as:
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000034
It can be concluded that the reference code rate can be K times the first code rate. However, when sending a TB corresponding to the first TBS in a mini-slot, the reference code rate may be greater than the code rate threshold. Assuming the first bit rate is 251/1024 and K = 4, that is, the time-frequency resource occupied by one transmission is 1/4 of the time-frequency resource occupied by 4 transmissions, and the reference code rate can be (251 * 4) / 1024 = 1004/1024. The bit rate threshold may be a maximum value in an MCS table of an existing protocol (3GPP TS 38.214 v15.3.0, section 6.1.4.1). For example, the target code rate indicated by MCS index 27 in the MCS table is 772/1024. 1004/1024 is greater than 772/1024, that is, the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold.
可选的,码率门限也可以为预定义或者预配置的码率。例如,0.95,1,1.33,1.67。所谓“预定义”可以是指根据协议预先写入设备中。所谓“预配置”可以是指网络设备预先指示的。Optionally, the code rate threshold may also be a predefined or pre-configured code rate. For example, 0.95, 1, 1.33, 1.67. The so-called "pre-defined" may refer to a device written in advance according to a protocol. The so-called "pre-configuration" may refer to a network device to indicate in advance.
若参考码率大于码率门限,应重新计算TBS,不用K个传输时机的资源来计算TBS,而用M个传输时机的资源来计算,M<K,且根据M确定的第一TBS作用于一个迷你时隙对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。M为满足参考码率不大于码率门限的最大正整数。所谓“参考码率”可以理解为将第一TBS对应的TB承载于一个迷你时隙所占用的时频资源上传输时的码率。执行S1702。If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, the TBS should be recalculated, instead of calculating the TBS with K transmission timing resources, and using the M transmission timing resources, M <K, and the first TBS determined according to M acts on The code rate corresponding to a mini-slot is less than or equal to the code rate threshold. M is the largest positive integer that satisfies the reference code rate not greater than the code rate threshold. The so-called "reference code rate" can be understood as the code rate when the TB corresponding to the first TBS is carried on the time-frequency resource occupied by a mini-slot. Go to S1702.
S1702、终端设备根据码率门限确定M。S1702. The terminal device determines M according to a code rate threshold.
示例的,可以采用公式九确定N′ TBS:N′ TBS=cd*M*N RE*Q m,其中,N′ TBS表示根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定的TBS的取值。N′ TBS对应的TB承载于一个迷你时隙上时,相应的1次传输占用的时频资源为M次传输所占用的时频资源的1/M。cd表示码率,例如,第一码率,N RE表示一个迷你时隙包括的RE数,或者N RE用于表示一个迷你时隙包括的用于传输数据或控制信息的RE数,Q m表示调制阶数,例如,第一调制阶数。若保证第一调制阶数不变,公式九可以整理为:
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000035
其中,M应满足的条件为
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000036
其中,cd max表示码率门限。从而,保证参考码率不大于码率门限。
For example, N ′ TBS can be determined using formula 9: N ′ TBS = cd * M * N RE * Q m , where N ′ TBS represents the number of REs included in the M mini-slots, the first bit rate, and the first The value of TBS determined by the modulation order. When the TB corresponding to N ′ TBS is carried on a mini-slot, the time-frequency resource occupied by the corresponding one transmission is 1 / M of the time-frequency resource occupied by the M transmissions. cd indicates the code rate, for example, the first code rate, N RE indicates the number of REs included in a mini-slot, or N RE indicates the number of REs included in a mini-slot for transmitting data or control information, and Q m indicates Modulation order, for example, the first modulation order. If the first modulation order is guaranteed to be constant, formula 9 can be summarized as:
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000035
Among them, the condition that M should satisfy is
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000036
Among them, cd max represents a code rate threshold. Therefore, it is guaranteed that the reference code rate is not greater than the code rate threshold.
示例的,假设传输时机数K=4,第一码率为251/1024,第一调制阶数为2,用两 个RB传输,每个RB为12个子载波,每个传输时机为2符号,码率门限为772/1024,则计算出的TBS为:For example, assuming that the number of transmission timings is K = 4, the first code rate is 251/1024, the first modulation order is 2, and two RBs are used for transmission, each RB is 12 subcarriers, and each transmission opportunity is 2 symbols. The bit rate threshold is 772/1024, and the calculated TBS is:
N TBS=cd*K*N RE*Q m=251/1024*4*(12*2*2)*2 N TBS = cd * K * N RE * Q m = 251/1024 * 4 * (12 * 2 * 2) * 2
将N TBS对应的TB承载于一个传输时机的RE上发送,则参考码率为, When the TB corresponding to N TBS is transmitted on an RE at a transmission opportunity, the reference code rate is,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000037
超过码率门限772/1024,则需要重新确定TBS,应满足:If the bit rate threshold exceeds 772/1024, the TBS needs to be determined again.
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000038
M的取值为3。The value of M is 3.
或者,码率门限为预定义或者预配置的码率。例如,码率门限为0.95。Alternatively, the code rate threshold is a predefined or pre-configured code rate. For example, the bit rate threshold is 0.95.
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000039
M的取值为3。
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000039
The value of M is 3.
可选的,M也可以为预定义、预配置或者由DCI动态指示的,无需终端设备计算M的取值。Optionally, M can also be predefined, pre-configured, or dynamically indicated by DCI, without requiring the terminal device to calculate the value of M.
可选的,若K个迷你时隙等长,也可以利用一个迷你时隙所占的时频资源而不是所有迷你时隙所占的总时频资源来计算TBS。例如,码率门限预设为772/1024,MCS索引为13,第一码率为526/1024,第一调制阶数为2,K=2,一个迷你时隙的时域长度为2符号,频域资源为物理资源块(Physical Resource Block,PRB)。根据2个迷你时隙计算的TBS为:Optionally, if the K mini-slots are of equal length, the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot may also be used to calculate the TBS using the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots. For example, the code rate threshold is preset to 772/1024, the MCS index is 13, the first code rate is 526/1024, the first modulation order is 2, K = 2, and the time domain length of a mini-slot is 2 symbols. The frequency domain resource is a physical resource block (Physical Resource Block, PRB). The TBS calculated based on 2 mini-slots is:
N TBS=cd*K*N RE*Q m=526/1024*2*(12*2*2)*2 N TBS = cd * K * N RE * Q m = 526/1024 * 2 * (12 * 2 * 2) * 2
因此,参考码率为1052/1024,参考码率大于码率门限,则重新计算TBS。利用一个迷你时隙所占的时频资源而不是所有迷你时隙所占的总时频资源计算TBS:Therefore, if the reference code rate is 1052/1024 and the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the TBS is recalculated. Calculate TBS using the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot instead of the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots:
N TBS=cd*K*N RE*Q m=526/1024*2*(12*2)*2 N TBS = cd * K * N RE * Q m = 526/1024 * 2 * (12 * 2) * 2
S1703、终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调整阶数确定第二TBS。S1703: The terminal device determines the second TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the M mini-slots.
具体的,可以包括以下步骤:Specifically, it may include the following steps:
第一,确定M个迷你时隙包括的RE数。具体的,利用公式六
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000040
确定M个迷你时隙包括的RE数。其中,N RE″表示M个迷你时隙包括的RE数;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000041
表示一个PRB中频域上的载波数,或者基于迷你时隙重复传输数据所占用的时域单位所对应的载波数,例如,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000042
时域单元也可以称为时间单元,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000043
表示M个迷你时隙内重复的所有PUSCH或PDSCH占用的符号数,例如,一个迷你时隙包括2个符号,M=4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000044
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000045
表示一个PRB中DMRS所占的RE数,包括DMRS开销,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000046
表示是由高层参数PUSCH-servingcellconfig中的xOverhead参数配置的开销。
First, determine the number of REs included in the M mini-slots. Specifically, using formula six
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000040
Determine the number of REs included in the M mini-slots. Wherein, N RE ″ represents the number of REs included in the M mini-slots;
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000041
Represents the number of carriers in the frequency domain of a PRB, or the number of carriers corresponding to the time domain unit occupied by repeated transmission of data based on mini-slots. For example,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000042
Time domain units can also be called time units,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000043
Represents the number of symbols occupied by all PUSCH or PDSCH repeated in M mini-slots, for example, a mini-slot includes 2 symbols, M = 4
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000044
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000045
Represents the number of REs occupied by DMRS in a PRB, including DMRS overhead.
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000046
Represents the overhead configured by the xOverhead parameter in the higher layer parameter PUSCH-servingcellconfig.
第二,根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数确定用于计算TBS的RE数。具体的,通过公式七N RE=min(156,N RE″)·n PRB获取用于计算TBS的RE数,其中,N RE表示用于计算TBS的RE数,n PRB表示PRB的个数。 Second, the number of REs used to calculate the TBS is determined according to the number of REs included in the M mini-slots. Specifically, the number of REs used to calculate TBS is obtained by formula N RE = min (156, N RE ″) · n PRB , where N RE represents the number of REs used to calculate TBS and n PRB represents the number of PRBs.
第三,根据用于计算TBS的RE数确定TBS。具体的,通过公式三N info=N RE·R·Q m·υ得到信息比特数。其中,Q m为调制阶数,R为码率,Q m和R是通过DCI中的MCS域所指示的值在协议中查表得到。υ表示母码码率。如果N info≤3824,通过公式四
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000047
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000048
在协议中查表得到不小于N′ info最近的一个值作为TBS;或者,如果N info>3824,通过公式五
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000049
计算信息比特的量化中间值,其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000050
如果码率R≤1/4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000051
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000052
否则,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000053
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000054
C表示编码块的数目。
Third, the TBS is determined based on the number of REs used to calculate the TBS. Specifically, the number of information bits is obtained by formula three N info = N RE · R · Q m · υ. Among them, Q m is the modulation order, R is the code rate, and Q m and R are obtained by looking up the table in the protocol through the value indicated by the MCS field in the DCI. υ represents the mother code rate. If N info ≤3824, by formula four
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000047
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000048
Look up the table in the protocol to get the latest value not less than N ′ info as TBS; or, if N info > 3824, use formula 5
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000049
Calculate the quantized median of the information bits, where,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000050
If the bit rate R≤1 / 4,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000051
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000052
otherwise,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000053
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000054
C represents the number of coding blocks.
S1704、终端设备根据第二TBS重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1704. The terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
S1705、网络设备接收S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1705: The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
网络设备接收到S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据后,可以先根据K个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定参考码率,具体解释可以参考S1701的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。若参考码率大于码率门限,再根据码率门限确定M,具体解释可以参考S1702的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。After receiving the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots for S times, the network device may first determine the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the K mini-slots. The detailed description of S1701 is not repeated here in the embodiment of the present application. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, then M is determined according to the code rate threshold. For a specific explanation, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1702, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
S1706、网络设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS。S1706. The network device determines the second TBS according to the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
确定第二TBS的具体的可以参考现有技术中的解释,本申请实施例在此不予赘述。For details of determining the second TBS, reference may be made to the explanation in the prior art, which is not described in the embodiment of the present application.
S1707、网络设备根据第二TBS解码迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1707: The network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
可以根据调制编码方式解调和解码数据,具体的可以参考现有技术,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。Data can be demodulated and decoded according to the modulation and coding mode. For details, reference may be made to the existing technology, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过调整计算TBS所使用的迷你时隙的个数,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can adjust the number of mini-slots used by the TBS before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold and avoid incomplete transmission of the data packet. The decoding failure at the receiving end will be caused and a retransmission is required, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
在第二种可实现方式中,M=K,若参考码率大于码率门限,可以通过利用比例因子确定TBS,克服参考码率大于码率门限。图18为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图四。如图18所示,该方法可以包括:In the second implementation, M = K. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the TBS can be determined by using a scale factor to overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold. FIG. 18 is a fourth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18, the method may include:
S1801、终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调整阶数确定第一TBS。S1801. The terminal device determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first adjustment order included in the M mini-slots.
首先,终端设备根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,参考码率为第二TBS作用于一个迷你时隙对应的码率。其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者DCI指示重复发送承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据的次数,M=K。例如,网络设备通过DCI动态指示或者由高层参数配置的重复次数K,PUSCH在K个 传输时机对应的时频资源上重复传输。第一调制编码方式可以是网络设备指示的。第一调制编码方式可以用于指示第一码率和第一调制阶数。例如,第一调制编码方式可以是MCS索引9。如表3所示,MCS索引9指示的调制阶数为2,即第一调制阶数为2,MCS索引9指示的码率为251/1024,即第一码率为251/1024。示例的,可以采用如下公式八确定TBS:N TBS=cd*K*N RE*Q m,其中,N TBS表示TBS的取值,cd表示码率,例如,第一码率,N RE表示一个迷你时隙包括的RE数,Q m表示调制阶数,例如,第一调制阶数。 First, the terminal device determines a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the K first time units. The reference code rate acts on a mini-slot corresponding to Bit rate. Among them, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of times pre-configuration or DCI instructs to repeatedly transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot, M = K. For example, the network device uses the DCI dynamic indication or the number of repetitions K configured by a high-level parameter, and the PUSCH is repeatedly transmitted on the time-frequency resources corresponding to the K transmission opportunities. The first modulation and coding mode may be indicated by the network device. The first modulation and coding method may be used to indicate a first code rate and a first modulation order. For example, the first modulation and coding scheme may be MCS index 9. As shown in Table 3, the modulation order indicated by MCS index 9 is 2, that is, the first modulation order is 2, and the code rate indicated by MCS index 9 is 251/1024, that is, the first code rate is 251/1024. For example, the following formula 8 can be used to determine TBS: N TBS = cd * K * N RE * Q m , where N TBS represents the value of TBS and cd represents the bit rate, for example, the first bit rate and N RE represents a The number of REs included in the mini-slot, Q m represents the modulation order, for example, the first modulation order.
确定参考码率的具体解释可以参考S1701的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For a specific explanation of determining the reference bit rate, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1701, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
若参考码率大于码率门限,可以根据比例因子确定第一TBS,第一TBS小于第二TBS。比例因子大于0且小于1,且根据第一TBS作用于一个迷你时隙对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。比例因子可以为高层参数或者DCI指示的。If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the first TBS may be determined according to a scale factor, and the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS. The scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and the code rate corresponding to a mini time slot acting on the first TBS is less than or equal to a code rate threshold. The scale factor may be indicated by a high-level parameter or DCI.
对应码率门限的解释可以参考上述阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For the explanation of the corresponding code rate threshold, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
S1802、终端设备根据第一TBS重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1802. The terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the first TBS.
S1803、网络设备接收S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1803. The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
S1804、网络设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS。S1804. The network device determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
网络设备接收到S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据后,根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调整阶数确定参考码率,具体解释可以参考S1801的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。若参考码率大于码率门限,执行S1805。After receiving the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots for S times, the network device determines the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the K first time units. For specific explanation, refer to S1801. The detailed description is omitted in the embodiments of the present application. If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, execute S1805.
S1805、网络设备根据第一TBS解码迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1805. The network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the first TBS.
需要说明的是,当上行数据传输或控制信息的传输是基于调度的,则比例因子可以是由DCI动态指示。当上行数据传输或控制信息的传输是免调度的,则比例因子可以由高层参数配置,或者由激活DCI指示(activation DCI)。例如,码率门限预设为772/1024。若网络设备指示比例因子为0.7,MCS索引为13,K=2,则根据2次迷你时隙计算的TBS承载在一个迷你时隙中时的参考码率为1052/1024,参考码率大于码率码率门限,则需要根据比例因子0.7调整TBS,经过调整后的码率为0.72,0.72小于码率门限。另外如果初次计算的TBS承载在一个迷你时隙的时频资源上传输时,参考码率不超过码率门限,则无需考虑比例因子,或者,终端设备认为比例因子为1。如果比例因子大于0.5,经过调整后的码率仍大于码率门限,则重新计算TBS,利用一个迷你时隙所占的时频资源而不是所有迷你时隙所占的总时频资源来计算TBS。It should be noted that, when uplink data transmission or control information transmission is based on scheduling, the scale factor may be dynamically indicated by DCI. When uplink data transmission or control information transmission is scheduling-free, the scale factor can be configured by high-level parameters, or activated by DCI indication (activation DCI). For example, the bit rate threshold is preset to 772/1024. If the network device indicates that the scale factor is 0.7, the MCS index is 13, and K = 2, the reference code rate of the TBS calculated based on 2 mini-slots carried in a mini-slot is 1052/1024, and the reference code rate is greater than the code Rate code rate threshold, you need to adjust the TBS according to a scale factor of 0.7. The adjusted code rate is 0.72, which is less than the code rate threshold. In addition, if the first calculated TBS is transmitted on the time-frequency resource of a mini-slot and the reference code rate does not exceed the code rate threshold, the scale factor need not be considered, or the terminal device considers the scale factor to be 1. If the scale factor is greater than 0.5 and the adjusted code rate is still greater than the code rate threshold, recalculate TBS and use the time-frequency resources occupied by one mini-slot instead of the total time-frequency resources occupied by all mini-slots to calculate TBS .
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,通过利用比例因子确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a scale factor before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference bit rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving end decoding failure caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. Retransmission is required once, thereby effectively improving transmission efficiency and reducing transmission delay.
在第三种可实现方式中,M=K,若参考码率大于码率门限,可以根据预配置的码率确定第一TBS,预配置的码率小于或等于码率门限,克服参考码率大于码率门限。图19为本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输块大小的方法流程图五。如图19所示,该方法可以包括:In the third implementation, M = K. If the reference code rate is greater than the code rate threshold, the first TBS can be determined according to the pre-configured code rate. The pre-configured code rate is less than or equal to the code rate threshold to overcome the reference code rate. Greater than the bit rate threshold. FIG. 19 is a fifth flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 19, the method may include:
S1901、终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS和参考码率。S1901. The terminal device determines the first TBS and the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
具体解释可以参考S1701的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For a specific explanation, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1701, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
若参考码率大于码率门限,执行S1902。If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, execute S1902.
S1902、终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS。S1902. The terminal device determines the second TBS according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
具体解释可以参考S1703的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For a specific explanation, reference may be made to the detailed description of S1703, which is not repeatedly described in the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,用于确定第二TBS的第二码率为码率门限,且根据第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。第二码率为预定义的或预配置的。第二调制阶数可以根据第二码率从MCS表中查找得到。It should be noted that the second code rate used to determine the second TBS is a code rate threshold, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the second TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold. The second code rate is predefined or pre-configured. The second modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table according to the second code rate.
示例的,假设码率门限为772/1024,第二码率为1,K=2,MCS索引为13,第一调制阶数为2,第一码率为526/1024,根据2个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调整阶数确定第一TBS,将第一TBS表示的比特数承载于一个迷你时隙所占用的时频资源上传输,参考码率为1052/1024,参考码率大于码率门限,则根据第二码率943/1024确定第二TBS。For example, suppose the code rate threshold is 772/1024, the second code rate is 1, K = 2, the MCS index is 13, the first modulation order is 2, and the first code rate is 526/1024. The slot includes the number of REs, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order to determine the first TBS. The number of bits indicated by the first TBS is transmitted on the time-frequency resources occupied by a mini-slot. The reference code rate is 1052 / 1024, if the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, the second TBS is determined according to the second bit rate of 943/1024.
S1903、终端设备根据第二TBS重复发送S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1903. The terminal device repeatedly sends data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
S1904、网络设备接收S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1904: The network device receives data carried on the symbol corresponding to the mini-slot for S times.
网络设备接收到S次承载于迷你时隙对应的符号上数据后,根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调整阶数确定参考码率,具体解释可以参考S1901的详细阐述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。若参考码率大于码率门限,执行S1905。After receiving the data carried on the symbols corresponding to the mini-slots S times, the network device determines the reference code rate according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first adjustment order included in the K first time units. For a specific explanation, refer to S1901 The detailed description is omitted in the embodiments of the present application. If the reference bit rate is greater than the bit rate threshold, execute S1905.
S1905、网络设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS。S1905. The network device determines the second TBS according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the M mini-slots.
需要说明的是,用于确定第二TBS的第二码率为码率门限,且根据第二TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。第二码率为预定义的或预配置的。第二调制阶数可以根据第二码率从MCS表中查找得到。It should be noted that the second code rate used to determine the second TBS is a code rate threshold, and the code rate corresponding to a first time unit acting on the second TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold. The second code rate is predefined or pre-configured. The second modulation order can be obtained from the MCS table according to the second code rate.
S1906、网络设备根据第二TBS解码迷你时隙对应的符号上数据。S1906: The network device decodes the data on the symbol corresponding to the mini time slot according to the second TBS.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的方法,在传输数据包之前,可以通过预配置的码率确定TBS,能够克服参考码率大于码率门限,避免数据包的不完整传输会导致的接收端解码失败,需要一次重传,从而,有效提高了传输效率,减小了传输时延。The method for determining the transmission block size provided in the embodiments of the present application can determine the TBS by using a pre-configured code rate before transmitting a data packet, which can overcome the reference code rate being greater than the code rate threshold, and avoid receiving caused by incomplete transmission of the data packet. The end decoding fails and requires a retransmission, thereby effectively improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission delay.
在第四种可实现方式中,终端设备根据M个迷你时隙包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS时,使用的M可以为预配置、预定义或DCI指示的,且根据M确定的第一TBS作用于一个第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。In a fourth implementation manner, when the terminal device determines the first TBS according to the RE number, the first bit rate, and the first modulation order included in the M mini-slots, the M used may be pre-configured, pre-defined, or DCI The code rate indicated by the first TBS determined according to M and acting on a first time unit is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
可选的,若迷你时隙不等长,用于计算TBS是否超过码率门限的迷你时隙可以为K个迷你时隙中最短的一个。例如,网络设备动态指示或者预配置的重复次数K为3,每个迷你时隙的时域长度分别为2符号、5符号和7符号,网络设备动态指示的MCS索引为13,MCS索引13对应的调制阶数为2,码率为526/1024,计算的TBS时,N RE可以为根据(2+5+7)符号确定的时频资源。将N TBS表示的编码后比特数承载在一个迷你时隙中发送,由于三个迷你时隙不等长,所以相应的等效码率不同。N TBS在2符号的迷你时隙上发送,参考码率为
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000055
网络设备预配置或者指示的码率门限为943/1024,3682/1024大于943/1024,所以回退计算TBS。
Optionally, if the mini-slots are not of equal length, the mini-slot used to calculate whether the TBS exceeds the code rate threshold may be the shortest one of the K mini-slots. For example, the network device dynamically indicates or preconfigures the number of repetitions K to be 3, and the time domain length of each mini-slot is 2 symbols, 5 symbols, and 7 symbols respectively. The MCS index dynamically indicated by the network device is 13, and the MCS index 13 corresponds The modulation order is 2 and the code rate is 526/1024. When calculating the TBS, N RE can be a time-frequency resource determined according to (2 + 5 + 7) symbols. The number of encoded bits represented by N TBS is carried in a mini-slot, and the three mini-slots are not of equal length, so the corresponding equivalent code rates are different. N TBS is transmitted on a mini-slot of 2 symbols, with a reference code rate
Figure PCTCN2019098944-appb-000055
The bit rate threshold pre-configured or indicated by the network device is 943/1024, and 3682/1024 is greater than 943/1024, so the TBS is calculated back.
或者,若传输时机不等长,用于计算TBS是否超过码率门限的迷你时隙也可以为 K个迷你时隙中最长的一个。Or, if the transmission timing is not equal, the mini-slot used to calculate whether the TBS exceeds the code rate threshold may also be the longest one of the K mini-slots.
对于下行信号传输,发送设备是网络设备,对应的接收设备是终端设备,TBS重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上的数据为下行数据。对于下行信号传输过程中确定传输块大小的过程可以是将图17至图19的执行主体互换即可,详细解释可以参考图17至图19所示的方法步骤,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。For downlink signal transmission, the transmitting device is a network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal device. The TBS repeatedly sends the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit for the downlink data. For the process of determining the transmission block size in the downlink signal transmission process, the execution bodies in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 may be interchanged. For detailed explanation, reference may be made to the method steps shown in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19. More details.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,分别从终端设备、网络设备、以及终端设备和网络设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如终端设备、网络设备为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,终端设备和网络设备包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。In the above-mentioned embodiments provided in the present application, the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are described from the perspectives of terminal equipment, network equipment, and interaction between the terminal equipment and the network equipment. It can be understood that, in order to implement each function in the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, each network element, such as a terminal device and a network device, includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in combination with the algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对终端设备、网络设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In the embodiment of the present application, functional modules may be divided into terminal equipment and network equipment according to the foregoing method examples. For example, functional modules may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图20示出了上述和实施例中涉及的确定传输块大小的装置的一种可能的组成示例图三,该确定传输块大小的装置能执行本申请各方法实施例中任一方法实施例中终端设备所执行的步骤。如图20所示,所述确定传输块大小的装置为终端设备或支持终端设备实现实施例中提供的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置可以是芯片系统。该确定传输块大小的装置可以包括:处理单元2001、发送单元2002和接收单元2003。In the case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 20 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block involved in the above and embodiments. FIG. 3 shows that the apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block can execute Steps performed by the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 20, the device for determining the size of the transmission block is a terminal device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports the terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment. For example, the device for determining the size of the transmission block may be a chip system. The apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 2001, a sending unit 2002, and a receiving unit 2003.
对于上行信号传输,其中,处理单元2001,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,处理单元2001,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1701~S1703,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1801,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1901~S1902。For uplink signal transmission, the processing unit 2001 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the processing unit 2001 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1701 to S1703 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. S1801 and S1901 to S1902 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
发送单元2002,用于发送数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1704,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1802,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1903。The sending unit 2002 is configured to send data. For example, the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1704 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17 and S1802 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18, S1903 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
对于下行信号传输,其中,接收单元2003,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,接收单元2003,用于接收数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1705,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1803,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1904。For downlink signal transmission, the receiving unit 2003 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the receiving unit 2003 is configured to receive data. For example, the device for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1705 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18. S1803, S1904 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG.
处理单元2001,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1706和S1707,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的 S1804和S1805,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1905~S1906。A processing unit 2001 for executing or for supporting a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1706 and S1707 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and S1804 and S1805, S1905 to S1906 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of each step involved in the foregoing method embodiments can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的装置,用于执行上述任意实施例的方法,因此可以达到与上述实施例的方法相同的效果。The apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
接收单元对应的实体设备可以为接收器,发送单元对应的实体设备可以为发射器,处理单元对应的实体设备可以为处理器。The physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图21示出了上述和实施例中涉及的确定传输块大小的装置的一种可能的组成示例图四,该确定传输块大小的装置能执行本申请各方法实施例中任一方法实施例中网络设备所执行的步骤。如图21所示,所述确定传输块大小的装置为网络设备或支持网络设备实现实施例中提供的方法的确定传输块大小的装置,例如该确定传输块大小的装置可以是芯片系统。该确定传输块大小的装置可以包括:处理单元2101、发送单元2102和接收单元2103。In the case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 21 shows a possible composition example of the apparatus for determining a transmission block size involved in the foregoing and embodiments. FIG. 4 shows that the apparatus for determining a transmission block size can execute Steps performed by a network device in any one of the method embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 21, the device for determining the size of a transmission block is a network device or a device for determining the size of a transmission block that supports a network device to implement the method provided in the embodiment. For example, the device for determining the size of a transmission block may be a chip system. The apparatus for determining a transmission block size may include a processing unit 2101, a sending unit 2102, and a receiving unit 2103.
对于上行信号传输,其中,接收单元2103,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,接收单元2103,用于接收数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1705,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1803,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1904。For uplink signal transmission, the receiving unit 2103 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the receiving unit 2103 is configured to receive data. For example, the apparatus for supporting the determination of the transmission block size executes S1705 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. S1803, S1904 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG.
处理单元2101,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1706和S1707,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1804和S1805,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1905和S1906。A processing unit 2101 for executing or for supporting a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1706 and S1707 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and S1804 and S1805, S1905 and S1906 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
对于下行信号传输,其中,处理单元2101,用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行本申请实施例中描述的方法。例如,处理单元2101,用于执行或用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1701~S1703,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1801,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1901和S1902。For downlink signal transmission, the processing unit 2101 is configured to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform the method described in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the processing unit 2101 is configured to execute or to support a device for determining a transmission block size to perform S1701 to S1703 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 17, and the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 18 S1801, S1901 and S1902 in the method for determining a transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
发送单元2102,用于发送数据,例如用于支持确定传输块大小的装置执行图17所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1704,图18所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1802,图19所示的确定传输块大小的方法中的S1903。A sending unit 2102 is configured to send data, for example, a device for supporting a determination of a transmission block size executes S1704 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 17 and S1802 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 18, S1903 in the method for determining the transmission block size shown in FIG. 19.
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of each step involved in the foregoing method embodiments can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供的确定传输块大小的装置,用于执行上述任意实施例的方法,因此可以达到与上述实施例的方法相同的效果。The apparatus for determining the size of a transmission block provided in this embodiment of the present application is configured to execute the method of any of the foregoing embodiments, and therefore, the same effect as that of the method of the foregoing embodiments can be achieved.
接收单元对应的实体设备可以为接收器,发送单元对应的实体设备可以为发射器,处理单元对应的实体设备可以为处理器。The physical device corresponding to the receiving unit may be a receiver, the physical device corresponding to the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit may be a processor.
图22示出了上述实施例中所涉及的网络设备的一种可能的结构示意图。FIG. 22 shows a possible structural diagram of a network device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
网络设备包括发射器/接收器2201、控制器/处理器2202和存储器2203。所述发射器/接收器2201用于支持网络设备与上述实施例中的所述的终端设备之间收发信息。所述控制器/处理器2202执行各种用于与终端设备通信的功能。在上行链路,来自所述终端设备的上行链路信号经由天线接收,由接收器2201进行调解,并进一步由控制 器/处理器2202进行处理来恢复终端设备所发送到业务数据和信令信息。在下行链路上,业务数据和信令消息由控制器/处理器2202进行处理,并由发射器2201进行调解来产生下行链路信号,并经由天线发射给终端设备。控制器/处理器2202还执行图17和图19中涉及网络设备的处理过程和/或用于本申请所描述的技术的其他过程。存储器2203用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。The network device includes a transmitter / receiver 2201, a controller / processor 2202, and a memory 2203. The transmitter / receiver 2201 is configured to support transmitting and receiving information between a network device and the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. The controller / processor 2202 performs various functions for communicating with a terminal device. In the uplink, the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, mediated by the receiver 2201, and further processed by the controller / processor 2202 to recover the service data and signaling information sent by the terminal device . On the downlink, the service data and signaling messages are processed by the controller / processor 2202 and mediated by the transmitter 2201 to generate downlink signals and transmitted to the terminal device via the antenna. The controller / processor 2202 also performs the processing procedures involving network devices in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19 and / or other procedures for the techniques described in this application. The memory 2203 is configured to store program code and data of a network device.
图23示出了上述实施例中所涉及的终端设备的一种可能的设计结构的简化示意图。所述终端设备包括发射器2301,接收器2302,控制器/处理器2303,存储器2304和调制解调处理器2305。FIG. 23 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of the terminal device involved in the foregoing embodiment. The terminal device includes a transmitter 2301, a receiver 2302, a controller / processor 2303, a memory 2304, and a modem processor 2305.
发射器2301用于发送上行链路信号(重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据),该上行链路信号经由天线发射给上述实施例中所述的网络设备。在下行链路上,天线接收上述实施例中网络设备发射的下行链路信号(重复发送S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据)。接收器2302用于接收从天线接收到的下行链路信号(S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据)。在调制解调处理器2305中,编码器2306接收要在上行链路上发送的业务数据和信令消息,并对业务数据和信令消息进行处理。调制器2307进一步处理(例如,符号映射和调制)编码后的业务数据和信令消息并提供输出采样。解调器2309处理(例如,解调)该输入采样并提供符号估计。解码器2308处理(例如,解码)该符号估计并提供发送给终端设备的已解码的数据和信令消息。编码器2306、调制器2307、解调器2309和解码器2308可以由合成的调制解调处理器2305来实现。这些单元根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术来进行处理。The transmitter 2301 is configured to send an uplink signal (repeatedly transmitting data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times), and the uplink signal is transmitted to the network device described in the foregoing embodiment via an antenna. On the downlink, the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the network device in the above embodiment (repeatedly sending S data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit). The receiver 2302 is configured to receive a downlink signal received from an antenna (S times is carried on data on a symbol corresponding to a first time unit). In the modem processor 2305, the encoder 2306 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages. The modulator 2307 further processes (e.g., symbol maps and modulates) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples. A demodulator 2309 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates. The decoder 2308 processes (e.g., decodes) the symbol estimates and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device. The encoder 2306, the modulator 2307, the demodulator 2309, and the decoder 2308 may be implemented by a synthetic modem processor 2305. These units process according to the radio access technology used by the radio access network.
控制器/处理器2303对终端设备的动作进行控制管理,用于执行上述实施例中由终端设备进行的处理。例如用于控制终端设备根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,且根据TBS解码第一时间单元对应的符号上数据和/或本申请所描述的技术的其他过程。作为示例,控制器/处理器2303用于支持终端设备执行图17中的过程S1701~S1703、图18中的过程S1801,图19中的过程S1901。The controller / processor 2303 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. For example, it is used to control the terminal device to determine the TBS according to the RE numbers and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, and to decode the data on the symbols corresponding to the first time unit and / or other processes of the technology described in this application according to the TBS. As an example, the controller / processor 2303 is used to support the terminal device to perform processes S1701 to S1703 in FIG. 17, process S1801 in FIG. 18, and process S1901 in FIG. 19.
在本申请实施例中,处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which may implement or The disclosed methods, steps and logic block diagrams in the embodiments of the present application are executed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as Random-access memory (RAM). The memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing program instructions and / or data.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模 块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated as required. Completed by different functional modules, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be divided. The combination can either be integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、终端或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal, or another programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like that includes one or more available medium integration. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, an SSD).
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above description is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application shall be covered by the scope of protection of this application. . Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (34)

  1. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;Receive the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K means that the pre-configured repeated transmission bearer is carried in the The number of times of data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    根据M个所述第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数;Determine the TBS according to the number of resource element REs and modulation and coding modes included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    根据所述TBS解码所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。Decoding data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS.
  2. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;TBS is determined according to the number of resource elements RE included in the M first time units and the modulation and coding method, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents pre-configured repeat transmission The number of times of data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    根据所述TBS重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。According to the TBS, the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is repeatedly sent S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  3. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收单元,用于接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A receiving unit for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents a pre-configured repeat The number of times the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is sent;
    处理单元,用于根据M个所述第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,且根据所述TBS解码所述接收单元接收到的所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,其中,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。A processing unit, configured to determine a TBS according to the number of resource elements RE included in the M first time units and a modulation and coding method, and decode the symbols corresponding to the first time units received by the receiving unit according to the TBS Data, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  4. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    处理单元,用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A processing unit, configured to determine TBS according to the number of resource elements RE included in the first first time unit and the modulation and coding method, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K Indicates the number of times that the pre-configured data is repeatedly transmitted on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    发送单元,用于根据所述处理单元确定的所述TBS重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。The sending unit is configured to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS determined by the processing unit, where S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的确定传输块大小的方法或权利要求3或4所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,M=K,K中第一次传输时机为t,所述第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 1 or 2 or the device for determining a transmission block size according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that M = K, and the first transmission timing in K is t, so The first transmission opportunity is the first time to transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的确定传输块大小的方法或确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,S=K-t+1,表示在第二时间单元内重复传输承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数。The method for determining the size of a transmission block or the device for determining the size of a transmission block according to claim 5, wherein S = K-t + 1, which means that the transmission is carried in the first time unit repeatedly in the second time unit The number of times the data on the corresponding symbol.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的确定传输块大小的方法或确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,S=K,表示在第二时间单元内重复传输承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数。The method for determining the size of a transmission block or the device for determining the size of a transmission block according to claim 5, characterized in that S = K, which means that the symbol carried on the second time unit is repeatedly transmitted and carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit The number of times of the data.
  8. 根据权利要求1或2所述的确定传输块大小的方法,其特征在于,M=1,在所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS之后,包括:The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that M = 1, after determining the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, comprising:
    若P个所述第一时间单元对应的符号承载有解调参考信号DMRS,根据第一标度因子调整所述TBS得到第一调整后的TBS,所述第一标度因子大于1,P为整数,P大于或等于1,且小于K。If P symbols corresponding to the first time unit carry a demodulation reference signal DMRS, adjust the TBS according to a first scale factor to obtain a first adjusted TBS, where the first scale factor is greater than 1, and P is Integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K.
  9. 根据权利要求1或2所述的确定传输块大小的方法,其特征在于,M=1,在所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS之后,还包括:The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 1 or 2, wherein M = 1, and after determining the TBS according to the RE number and the modulation and coding method included in the M first time units, further comprising:
    若所述第一时间单元对应的所有符号用于承载物理上行共享信道PUSCH或物理下行共享信道PDSCH,根据第二标度因子调整所述TBS得到第二调整后的TBS,所述第二标度因子小于1。If all symbols corresponding to the first time unit are used to carry a physical uplink shared channel PUSCH or a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, adjusting the TBS according to a second scale factor to obtain a second adjusted TBS, the second scale The factor is less than 1.
  10. 根据权利要求3或4所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于,M=1时,若P个所述第一时间单元对应的符号承载有解调参考信号DMRS,根据第一标度因子调整所述TBS得到第一调整后的TBS,所述第一标度因子大于1,P为整数,P大于或等于1,且小于K。The device for determining a transmission block size according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: when M = 1, if P symbols corresponding to the first time unit carry demodulation references The signal DMRS adjusts the TBS according to a first scale factor to obtain a first adjusted TBS. The first scale factor is greater than 1, P is an integer, P is greater than or equal to 1, and less than K.
  11. 根据权利要求3或4所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于,M=1时,若所述第一时间单元对应的所有符号用于承载物理上行共享信道PUSCH或物理下行共享信道PDSCH,根据第二标度因子调整所述TBS得到第二调整后的TBS,所述第二标度因子小于1。The device for determining a transmission block size according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: when M = 1, if all symbols corresponding to the first time unit are used to carry physical uplink sharing Channel PUSCH or physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, adjusting the TBS according to a second scaling factor to obtain a second adjusted TBS, the second scaling factor being less than 1.
  12. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;Receive the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K means that the pre-configured repeated transmission bearer is carried in the The number of times of data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    当K个所述第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS;When the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, determining the TBS according to the number of resource elements RE and the modulation and coding mode corresponding to the reference duration;
    根据所述TBS解码所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据;Decoding data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS;
    其中,所述参考时长等于所述第二时间单元的时长;或者,所述参考时长等于R个所述第一时间单元的时长,所述R为小于K的最大整数,且所述参考时长小于所述第二时间单元的时长。The reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or the reference duration is equal to the durations of the R first time units, where R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than A duration of the second time unit.
  13. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;When the duration of the K first time units is longer than the duration of a second time unit, the TBS is determined according to the number of resource elements RE and the modulation and coding method corresponding to the reference duration, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents a pre-configured repeated transmission bearer The number of times of data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    根据所述TBS重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K;Repeatedly sending data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the TBS, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K;
    其中,所述参考时长等于所述第二时间单元的时长;或者,所述参考时长等于R个所述第一时间单元的时长,所述R为小于K的最大整数,且所述参考时长小于所述第二时间单元的时长。The reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or the reference duration is equal to the durations of the R first time units, where R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than A duration of the second time unit.
  14. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收单元,用于接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A receiving unit for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents a pre-configured repeat The number of times the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is sent;
    处理单元,用于当K个所述第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,并根据所述TBS解码所述接收单元接收到的所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,其中,所述参考时长等于所述第二时间单元的时长;或者,所述参考时长等于R个所述第一时间单元的时长,所述R为小于K的最大整数,且所述参考时长小于所述第二时间单元的时长。A processing unit, configured to: when the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, determine a TBS according to the number of resource elements RE and the modulation and coding method corresponding to the reference duration, and decode the reception according to the TBS The data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit received by the unit, wherein the reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or the reference duration is equal to the duration of the R first time units, The R is a maximum integer less than K, and the reference duration is shorter than the duration of the second time unit.
  15. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    处理单元,用于当K个第一时间单元的时长大于一个第二时间单元的时长,根据参考时长对应的资源元素RE数和调制编码方式确定TBS,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A processing unit, configured to determine the TBS according to the number of resource elements RE and the modulation coding method corresponding to the reference duration when the duration of the K first time units is greater than the duration of a second time unit, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and K represents Pre-configured times of repeatedly sending data carried on a symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    发送单元,用于根据所述处理单元确定的所述TBS,重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K;A sending unit, configured to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the TBS determined by the processing unit, where S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K;
    其中,所述参考时长等于所述第二时间单元的时长;或者,所述参考时长等于R个所述第一时间单元的时长,所述R为小于K的最大整数,且所述参考时长小于所述第二时间单元的时长。The reference duration is equal to the duration of the second time unit; or the reference duration is equal to the durations of the R first time units, where R is the largest integer less than K, and the reference duration is less than A duration of the second time unit.
  16. 根据权利要求12~13中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法或权利要求14~15中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,K中第一次传输时机为t,所述第一次传输时机为第一次发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的时机,其中,t为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的正整数。The method for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 12 to 13, or the device for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 14 to 15, characterized in that the first transmission timing in K is Is t, the first transmission opportunity is the first time to transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, where t is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  17. 根据权利要求1-16中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法或确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时间单元为迷你时隙,第二时间单元为时隙。The method for determining a transmission block size or the device for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 1 to 16, wherein the first time unit is a mini time slot and the second time unit is a time slot.
  18. 根据权利要求1-16中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法或确定传输块大小的装置,所述K的数值为预定义的或者由下行控制信息DCI动态指示的。According to the method for determining a transmission block size or the apparatus for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 1 to 16, the value of K is predefined or dynamically indicated by downlink control information DCI.
  19. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者下行控制信息DCI指示重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;Receive the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents pre-configuration or downlink control information DCI indication The number of times repeatedly sending data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    根据M个所述第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数;Determine the first TBS according to the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    根据所述第一TBS解码所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据。Decoding the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit according to the first TBS.
  20. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者下行控制信息DCI指示重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;Determine the first TBS according to the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, and K is greater than or equal to 2 An integer of K, K represents the number of times that the pre-configured or downlink control information DCI instructs to repeatedly transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    根据所述第一TBS重复发送S次承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。According to the first TBS, the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is repeatedly sent S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的确定传输块大小的方法,其特征在于,在所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS之前,所述方法还包括:The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that the first is determined according to the number of resource elements RE included in the M first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order. Prior to TBS, the method further includes:
    根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、所述第一码率和所述第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述第一码率由网络设备指示,所述第一调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;Determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order, where the reference code rate acts on a second TBS A code rate corresponding to the first time unit, the first code rate is indicated by a network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据所述码率门限确定M,M<K,且根据所述M确定的所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determine M and M <K according to the code rate threshold, and the first TBS determined according to M acting on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit is less than Or equal to the bit rate threshold.
  22. 根据权利要求19或20所述的确定传输块大小的方法,其特征在于,M=K,所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,包括:The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 19 or 20, wherein M = K, and the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order are included according to M first time units. Determine the first TBS, including:
    根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、所述第一码率和所述第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述第一码率由网络设备指示,所述第一调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;Determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order, where the reference code rate acts on a second TBS A code rate corresponding to the first time unit, the first code rate is indicated by a network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据比例因子确定所述第一TBS,所述第一TBS小于所述第二TBS,所述比例因子大于0且小于1,且根据所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference bit rate is greater than a bit rate threshold, determine the first TBS according to a scale factor, the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and according to the first TBS A code rate corresponding to one of the first time units is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  23. 根据权利要求19或20所述的确定传输块大小的方法,其特征在于,M=K,所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS之前,所述方法还包括:The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 19 or 20, wherein M = K, and the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order are included according to M first time units. Before determining the first TBS, the method further includes:
    根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述第二码率由网络设备指示,所述第二调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;Determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the K first time units, the reference code rate acting on one of the first times by the second TBS A code rate corresponding to the unit, the second code rate is indicated by a network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    所述根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,包括:The determining the first TBS according to the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units includes:
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据所述M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、所述第一码率和所述第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,用于确定所述第一TBS的所述第一码率为所述码率门限,且根据所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining a first TBS according to the number of REs included in the M first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order, and determining the first TBS The first code rate of a TBS is the code rate threshold, and the code rate corresponding to one of the first time units according to the first TBS is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  24. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    接收单元,用于接收S次承载于第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者下行控制信息DCI指示重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A receiving unit for receiving data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K, K is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents pre-configuration or The downlink control information DCI indicates the number of times the data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit is repeatedly transmitted;
    处理单元,用于根据M个所述第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,且根据所述第一TBS解码所述接收单元接收到的所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数。A processing unit, configured to determine a first TBS according to the number of resource element REs, a first code rate, and a first modulation order included in the M first time units, and decode the received by the receiving unit according to the first TBS For the data on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K.
  25. 一种确定传输块大小TBS的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a transmission block size TBS, which includes:
    处理单元,用于根据M个第一时间单元包括的资源元素RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,M为大于或等于1,且小于或等于K的整数,K为大于或等于2的整数,K表示预配置或者下行控制信息DCI指示重复发送承载于所述第一时间单元对应的符号上数据的次数;A processing unit, configured to determine the first TBS according to the number of resource elements RE, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, K Is an integer greater than or equal to 2, K represents the number of times the pre-configuration or downlink control information DCI instructs to repeatedly transmit data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit;
    发送单元,用于根据所述处理单元确定的所述第一TBS重复发送S次承载于所述 第一时间单元对应的符号上数据,S为整数,S大于或等于1,且小于或等于K。A sending unit, configured to repeatedly send data carried on the symbol corresponding to the first time unit S times according to the first TBS determined by the processing unit, S is an integer, S is greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to K .
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元,还用于:The apparatus for determining a transmission block size according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:
    根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、所述第一码率和所述第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述第一码率由网络设备指示,所述第一调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;Determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order, where the reference code rate acts on a second TBS A code rate corresponding to the first time unit, the first code rate is indicated by a network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据所述码率门限确定M,M<K,且根据所述M确定的所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determine M and M <K according to the code rate threshold, and the first TBS determined according to M acting on a code rate corresponding to a first time unit is less than Or equal to the bit rate threshold.
  27. 根据权利要求24或25所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,M=K,所述处理单元,用于:The apparatus for determining a transmission block size according to claim 24 or 25, wherein M = K, and the processing unit is configured to:
    根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、所述第一码率和所述第一调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述第一码率由网络设备指示,所述第一调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;Determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the number of REs included in the K first time units, the first code rate, and the first modulation order, where the reference code rate acts on a second TBS A code rate corresponding to the first time unit, the first code rate is indicated by a network device, and the first modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据比例因子确定所述第一TBS,所述第一TBS小于所述第二TBS,所述比例因子大于0且小于1,且根据所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference bit rate is greater than a bit rate threshold, determine the first TBS according to a scale factor, the first TBS is smaller than the second TBS, the scale factor is greater than 0 and less than 1, and according to the first TBS A code rate corresponding to one of the first time units is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  28. 根据权利要求24或25所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,M=K,The device for determining a transmission block size according to claim 24 or 25, wherein M = K,
    所述处理单元,还用于根据K个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第二码率和第二调制阶数确定第二TBS和参考码率,所述参考码率为所述第二TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率,所述参考码率由网络设备指示,所述第二调制阶数由所述网络设备指示;The processing unit is further configured to determine a second TBS and a reference code rate according to the RE number, the second code rate, and the second modulation order included in the K first time units, where the reference code rate is the second TBS Acting on a code rate corresponding to the first time unit, the reference code rate is indicated by a network device, and the second modulation order is indicated by the network device;
    所述处理单元,用于:The processing unit is configured to:
    若所述参考码率大于码率门限,根据M个第一时间单元包括的RE数、第一码率和第一调制阶数确定第一TBS,用于确定所述第一TBS的所述第一码率为所述码率门限,且根据所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。If the reference code rate is greater than a code rate threshold, determining a first TBS according to the RE number, the first code rate, and the first modulation order included in the M first time units, for determining the first TBS of the first TBS A code rate is the code rate threshold, and according to the first TBS, a code rate corresponding to one of the first time units is less than or equal to the code rate threshold.
  29. 根据权利要求19或20所述的确定传输块大小的方法或权利要求24或25所述的确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述M为预配置、预定义或DCI指示的,且根据所述M确定的所述第一TBS作用于一个所述第一时间单元对应的码率小于或等于码率门限。The method for determining a transmission block size according to claim 19 or 20 or the device for determining a transmission block size according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the M is pre-configured, predefined, or indicated by a DCI, and A code rate corresponding to one of the first time units determined by the first TBS determined according to M is less than or equal to a code rate threshold.
  30. 根据权利要求19-29中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法或确定传输块大小的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时间单元的时长为K个第一时间单元的时长中最大值或最小值。The method for determining a transmission block size or the device for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 19 to 29, wherein the duration of the first time unit is the largest of the durations of the K first time units Value or minimum.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括:计算机软件指令;A computer-readable storage medium, comprising: computer software instructions;
    当所述计算机软件指令在确定传输块大小的装置或内置在确定传输块大小的装置的芯片中运行时,使得所述装置执行如权利要求1、5至9、以及17和18中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法,或者权利要求12、16至18中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法,或者权利要求19-23、29、30中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法。When the computer software instructions are executed in a device for determining a transmission block size or a chip built in the device for determining a transmission block size, the device is caused to execute any one of claims 1, 5 to 9, and 17 and 18 The method for determining the size of a transmission block, or the method for determining the size of a transmission block according to any one of claims 12, 16 to 18, or the method according to any one of claims 19-23, 29, and 30 Method of transmitting block size.
  32. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括:计算机软件指令;A computer-readable storage medium, comprising: computer software instructions;
    当所述计算机软件指令在确定传输块大小的装置或内置在确定传输块大小的装置的芯片中运行时,使得所述装置执行如权利要求2、5至9、以及17和18中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法,或者权利要求13、16至18中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法,或者权利要求19-23、29、30中任一项所述的确定传输块大小的方法。When the computer software instructions are executed in a device for determining a transmission block size or a chip built in the device for determining a transmission block size, the device is caused to execute any one of claims 2, 5 to 9, and 17 and 18 The method for determining a transmission block size, or the method for determining a transmission block size according to any one of claims 13, 16 to 18, or the method according to any one of claims 19-23, 29, and 30 Method of transmitting block size.
  33. 一种通信装置,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器相连,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1、5至9、以及17和18中任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求12、16至18中任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求19-23、29、30中任一项所述的方法。A communication device includes a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to execute the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes The method according to any one of 1, 5, to 9, and 17 and 18, or the method according to any one of claims 12, 16 to 18, or any one of claims 19 to 23, 29, and 30 The method described.
  34. 一种通信装置,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器相连,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置执行如权利要求2、5至9、以及17和18中任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求13、16至18中任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求19-23、29、30中任一项所述的方法。A communication device includes a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to execute the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes The method according to any one of 2, 5 to 9, and 17 and 18, or the method according to any one of claims 13, 16 to 18, or any one of claims 19 to 23, 29, and 30 The method described.
PCT/CN2019/098944 2018-08-10 2019-08-01 Method and apparatus for determining transport block size WO2020029866A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810911082 2018-08-10
CN201810911082.3 2018-08-10
CN201910028872.1 2019-01-11
CN201910028872.1A CN110830161B (en) 2018-08-10 2019-01-11 Method and device for determining size of transmission block

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020029866A1 true WO2020029866A1 (en) 2020-02-13

Family

ID=69415372

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/098944 WO2020029866A1 (en) 2018-08-10 2019-08-01 Method and apparatus for determining transport block size

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020029866A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170332359A1 (en) * 2016-05-11 2017-11-16 Convida Wireless, Llc Radio Download Control Channel
CN107872818A (en) * 2016-09-27 2018-04-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data processing method, node and terminal
WO2018107944A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-06-21 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for mixed grant-free and grant-based uplink transmissions

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170332359A1 (en) * 2016-05-11 2017-11-16 Convida Wireless, Llc Radio Download Control Channel
CN107872818A (en) * 2016-09-27 2018-04-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data processing method, node and terminal
WO2018107944A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-06-21 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for mixed grant-free and grant-based uplink transmissions

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ERICSSO N: "On MCS/transport Block Size Determination", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 NR AD-HOC#2, R1-1711501, 17 June 2017 (2017-06-17), XP051305629 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110830161B (en) Method and device for determining size of transmission block
TWI748983B (en) Method and device for service transmission
RU2652418C1 (en) System and method of joint transmission in licensed and unlicensed ranges with using of fountain codes
WO2018040779A1 (en) Downlink transmission method and device
RU2754583C1 (en) Allocating a time domain for repetitions
WO2020200078A1 (en) Method for transmitting uplink information and communication device
JP2019512898A (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2018228579A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining transport block size
CN113068259B (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2019028771A1 (en) Data transmission method and terminal device
WO2018165987A1 (en) Uplink transmission method, apparatus, terminal device, access network device and system
WO2018082043A1 (en) Communication method, terminal, and network device
WO2017143837A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
WO2020169063A1 (en) Data transmission method, and communication apparatus
WO2018081989A1 (en) Uplink control information transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2020063275A1 (en) Information indicating method and apparatus
WO2018082424A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2020063838A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting data
WO2020199790A1 (en) Information indication method and communication apparatus
WO2020143366A1 (en) Transmitting and receiving method and device
WO2021159979A1 (en) Feedback method and apparatus for hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement codebook
WO2019029463A1 (en) Method and device for receiving control information and sending control information
WO2020143514A1 (en) Power control method and power control apparatus
WO2021072610A1 (en) Method and apparatus for activating and releasing non-dynamic scheduling transmission
WO2021056320A1 (en) Uplink control information multiplexing transmission method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19847049

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19847049

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1